This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
Contents
2013 RDX
QRG Online Reference Owner's Manual
2 Safe Driving P. 23
For Safe Driving P. 24
Seat Belts P. 29
Airbags P. 37
This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Instrument Panel P. 67
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
Indicators P. 68
Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 82
This owner's manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
2 Controls P. 95
Setting the Clock P. 96 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 97 Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 118 Adjusting the Seats P. 136
Images throughout this owner's manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
2 Features P. 157
Audio System P. 158 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver P. 194
Audio System Basic Operation P. 161
Index
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Navigation Key
QRG Quick Reference Guide
TOC Chapter Table of Contents
Index Index
Book Table of Contents
31TX4601A © 2012 American Honda Motor Co., Inc - All Rights Reserved
2 Driving P. 227
Before Driving P. 228
Towing a Trailer P. 233
Parking Your Vehicle P. 261 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 262
2 Maintenance P. 267
Before Performing Maintenance P. 268 Maintenance MinderTM P. 271
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 297
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 312
Cleaning P. 313
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 317
Tools P. 318
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 319
Overheating P. 331
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 333
2 Information P. 343
Specifications P. 344 Emissions Testing P. 349
Identification Numbers P. 346 Warranty Coverages P. 351
Child Safety P. 52
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Safety Labels P. 65
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 107 Security System P. 113 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 119 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 143
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 115 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 133 Climate Control System P. 152
Audio Error Messages P. 187 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 196
General Information on the Audio System P. 190 Compass* P. 225
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 238 When Driving P. 240
Refueling P. 263
Fuel Economy P. 265
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 275 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 287 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 301 Battery P. 310
Braking P. 257 Accessories and Modifications P. 266
Remote Transmitter Care P. 311
Engine Does Not Start P. 325 Fuses P. 337
Jump Starting P. 328 Emergency Towing P. 340
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 347 Authorized Manuals P. 353
Reporting Safety Defects P. 348 Client Service Information P. 354
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 330 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 341
Contents
2013 RDX Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Safe Driving P. 23 Instrument Panel P. 67
Controls P. 95 Features P. 157 Driving P. 227 Maintenance P. 267 Handling the Unexpected P. 317 Information P. 343
Index P. 355
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
QRG
Index
2
System Indicators (P 68) Gauges (P 82) Multi-Information Display (P 83)
Audio/Information Screen* Hazard Warning Button
Audio System (P 158) Navigation System*
() See Navigation System Manual
Climate Control System (P 152)
Rear Window Defogger (P 129) Heated Mirror Button (P 129) ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 119) Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 132)
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P 252)
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
QRG
Headlights/Turn Signals (P 122) Fog Lights* (P 125)
(SEL/RESET) Knob (P 128) Brightness Control (P 128)
Wipers/Washers (P 126)
Cruise Control Buttons (P 248) Horn (Press an area around .) Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*
() See Navigation System Manual
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 196)
MODE Button (P165) CH (Channel) Buttons (P165) VOL (Volume) Buttons (P165)
Index
* Not available on all models 3
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Visual Index
QRG
Power Window Switches (P 115) Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 105) Door Mirror Controls (P 134)
Index
4
Parking Brake (P 257) Hood Release Handle (P 276) Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 264)
Interior Fuse Box (P 338) Rearview Mirror (P 133)
Driver's Front Airbag (P 40)
Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 40)
Shift Lever Automatic
Transmission (P 243)
Glove Box (P 145) Accessory Power Socket
(P 148)
Seat Heater Switches (P 151)
Cargo Area Light (P 144)
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P 34) Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 59)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 60)
Side Curtain Airbags (P 47)
Ceiling Light (P 143)
Seat Belts (P 29)
Moonroof Switch (P 118) Map Lights (P 143)
Sunglasses Holder (P 150) Sun Visors
Vanity Mirrors
Accessory Power Socket (P 148) USB Adapter Cable (P 159) Auxiliary Input Jack (P 159)
Accessory Power Socket (P 148)
Front Seat (P 136) Side Airbags (P 44)
Coat Hook (P 149) Grab Handle Rear Seat (P 141) LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 57)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
QRG
Index
5
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Visual Index
QRG
Index
6
Maintenance Under the Hood (P 275)
Windshield Wipers (P 126) (P 297) Power Door Mirrors (P 134)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 99)
Headlights (P 122) (P 287) Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 122) (P 291) Side Marker Lights (P 122) (P 291) Tires (P 301) (P 319)
Fog Lights* (P 125) (P 289) How to Refuel (P 264) High-Mount Brake Light (P 296) Rear Wiper (P 127) (P 299) Opening/Closing the Tailgate
(P 107)
Tailgate Release Button (P 108)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P 262)
Brake/Taillights (P 292) Back-Up Lights (P 294) Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 292) Rear Side Marker Lights (P 292)
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Safe Driving (P 23)
QRG
Airbags (P 37)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 52)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P 29)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
Before Driving Checklist (P 28)
back in the seat. Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
Index
7
Instrument Panel (P 67)
QRG Gauges (P 82)/Multi-Information Display (P 83)/
System Indicators (P 68)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Index
8
System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Charging System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator
U.S. Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Keyless Access System Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Temperature Gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer
Security System Alarm Indicator
Lights Reminders
Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator Fog Light Indicator*
Fuel Gauge
System Indicators
AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System Indicator*
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
U.S. Side Airbag Off Indicator
Canada
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
System Message Indicator
U.S. Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Canada
* Not available on all models
Controls (P 95)
Clock (P 96)
Models without navigation system
a Press and hold the CLOCK (AUX)
button until Adjust Clock appears.
b Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
to set the time.
c Press the CLOCK button again to set
the time.
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 119)
Press the button to changes the vehicle's power mode.
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until Adjust Clock appears, then press the (6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00
Turn Signals (P 122)
Turn Signal Control Lever Right
Models with navigation system
The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.
Left
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
QRG
Lights (P 122)
Light Control Switches
High Beam Low Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers (P 126)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever Adjustment Ring : Long Delay : Short Delay
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
Index
9
Steering Wheel (P 132)
Unlocking the Front Doors Tailgate (P 107)
QRG
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
from the Inside (P 104)
Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate.
Touch the tailgate release button to unlock and open the tailgate.
Models with the power tailgate
Press the power tailgate button on the instrument panel or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate.
Index
10
Power Door Mirrors (P 134)
With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Place the selector switch in the L or R position to use the reverse tilt door mirror feature.
Selector Switch
Power Windows (P 115)
With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger's window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Indicator
Adjustment Switch
Window Switch
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
QRG
Index
11
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Climate Control System (P 152)
QRG
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
/ (Fan Control) Buttons (On/Off) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
Index
AUTO Button
MODE Control Button
Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror) Button (Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
12
Features (P 157)
Audio System (P 158)
For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual
Audio/Information Screen
Audio Remote Controls (P 165) VOL (Volume) Buttons
MODE Button
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Button
(CD Eject) Button
FM/AM Button Preset Buttons (1-6) CATEGORY Bar SCAN Button
PHONE Button
BACK Button
Selector Knob
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
CD Slot CD Button AUX Button
SKIP Bar A.SEL Button
DISPLAY Button
SETUP Button
CH (Channel) Buttons
VOL (Volume) Button Press and release to adjust the volume up/ down.
MODE Button Press and release to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/CD/XM1/XM2/AUX.
CH (Channel) Button Radio:Press and release to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. CD/USB device: Press and release to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.
Index
13
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
QRG
Driving (P 227)
Automatic Transmission (P 244)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting
Release Button
Park
Shift Lever
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Paddle Shifters (P 246)
Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on. Gear Position Indicator
Neutral Transmission is not locked.
Drive Normal driving. D-paddle shift mode can be used.
S Position Sequential shift mode can be used.
Selected Gear Number
M Indicator
The selected gear position is shown in the instrument panel.
Shift Down (-) Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+) Paddle Shifter
Index
14
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.
Press the release button to move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
VSA® OFF Button (P 252) Refueling (P 263)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P 248)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane number 91 or higher recommended
Fuel tank capacity: 16 US gal (60 L)
a Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the cap.
QRG
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press the DECEL/SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 253)
c Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill door.
d After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it clicks at least once.
TPMS monitors tire pressure. TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
Index
15
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Maintenance (P 267)
QRG Under the Hood (P 275)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
Wiper Blades (P 297)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
Index
Tires (P 301)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.
Lights (P 287)
Inspect all lights regularly.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
16
Handling the Unexpected (P 317)
Flat Tire (P 319)
QRG
Engine Won't Start (P 325) Overheating (P 331)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Indicators Come On (P 333)
Identify the indicator and consult the owner's manual.
Blown Fuse (P 337)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Emergency Towing (P 340)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Index
17
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
What to Do If
QRG
The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?
The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?
The steering wheel may be locked. Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
Index
18
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter?
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
QRG
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.
The beeper sounds when: The exterior lights are left on. The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Index
19
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
Why do I hear a screeching
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
QRG
sound when I apply the
inspected by a dealer.
brake pedal?
Is it possible to use unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 87 or higher on this vehicle?
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 91 or higher is recommended. Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
Index
20
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that QRG have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
21
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 RDX
A Few Words About Safety
QRG Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
3 DANGER 3 WARNING 3 CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
Index
22
2013 RDX QRG
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 24 Important Handling Information......... 26 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 27
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 29 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 32 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 37 Types of Airbags ................................ 40 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Side Airbags ...................................... 44 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 47 Airbag System Indicators.................... 48 Airbag Care ....................................... 51 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52 Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54 Safety of Larger Children ................... 62 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 65
Index
23
For Safe Driving
QRG The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
TOC most important.
2013 RDX
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
Restrain all children Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Index
Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
24
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Index
25
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
QRG Important Handling Information
2013 RDX
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use 1Important Handling Information
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway TOC driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:
Safe Driving
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
P. 242
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 238
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Index
26
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
i hl c
i
f
j
d
g h
j
k
e
g
b
a
b
a Safety Cage b Crush Zones c Seats and Seat-Backs d Head Restraints e Collapsible Steering Column f Seat Belts g Front Airbags h Side Airbags i Side Curtain Airbags j Door Locks k Seat Belt Tensioners l Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
2013 RDX
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
QRG TOC
Safe Driving
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
Index
Continued
27
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.
· After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
· Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 136
· Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 138
· Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32
· Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52
2013 RDX
1Safety Checklist If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes off. 2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 73
28
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
2013 RDX QRG
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
1About Your Seat Belts
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
3 WARNING
TOC
Safe Driving
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
the chance of serious injury or death in a
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
- rear impacts
- rollovers
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
Lap/shoulder seat belts
risk of serious injury.
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59
Continued
Index
29
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
2013 RDX
QRG
Safe Driving
Proper use of seat belts
1About Your Seat Belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use: TOC · All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
· Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
· Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Seat Belt Reminder
Index
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the power mode is set to ON before the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the driver's and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after the power mode is set to ON. When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator will not come on. This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot detect their presence.
30
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
2013 RDX
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
31
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 136
Pull out slowly.
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
2013 RDX
1Fastening a Seat Belt No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
Latch Plate
Buckle
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.
Index
32
Lap belt as low as possible
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
2013 RDX QRG
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as 1Fastening a Seat Belt
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
3 WARNING
TOC
Safe Driving
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
Push
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
Index
Continued
33
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
QRG
2013 RDX
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
TOC
Small Latch Plate
1. Pull out the seat belt's small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
3 WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Safe Driving
Latch Plate Small Latch Plate
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch Plate
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
Small Latch Plate
Index Buckle
34
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
2013 RDX
1Advice for Pregnant Women Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
· When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
· When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Index
35
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
QRG Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
1Seat Belt Inspection
2013 RDX
Safe Driving
TOC · Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
· Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
Index
36
Airbags
Airbag System Components
h a c kl i h a g j j b e c
n d b f h
e
h
h
Continued
2013 RDX QRG TOC
h m
Index
37
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
QRG
2013 RDX
The front, front side, and side curtain
d An electronic control unit that continually h Impact sensors that can detect a
airbags are deployed according to the
monitors and records information about
moderate to severe front or side collision.
TOC direction and severity of impact. Both side
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
Safe Driving
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
The airbag system includes:
passenger seat belt use when the power
you that the front passenger's front
mode is in ON.
airbag has been turned off.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The j Sensors that can detect if a child or small
in the center of the steering wheel; the
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
statured adult is in the deployment path
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
incorporate sensors that detect whether
of the front passenger's side airbag.
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
or not they are fastened.
AIRBAG.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
f A driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
alerts you to a possible problem with your
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
one for a front passenger. The airbags are with less force.
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
l An indicator on the instrument panel that
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. g Weight sensors in the front passenger's
alerts you that the front passenger's side
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
airbag has been turned off.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant m Safing Sensor
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
or small child).
The front and rear pillars are marked
n A rollover sensor that detects whether
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
the vehicle is about to roll over.
Index
38
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
2013 RDX QRG
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
TOC
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries,
Safe Driving
sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
sitting correctly.
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
the airbag cover.
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Index
39
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
QRG Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: · Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. TOC · Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. · Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.
2013 RDX
1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.
Safe Driving
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
Index
40
Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
1How the Front Airbags Work
After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag's surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
Index
Continued
41
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
42
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover.
When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
2013 RDX
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors.
2013 RDX
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
· Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. · Do not put any object under the passenger's seat. · Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
· Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Passenger's Seat Weight Sensors
Although Acura recommends against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger's front airbag.
Index
43
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
QRG Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. TOC
Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing Location
2013 RDX
1Side Airbags Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the airbag may not deploy when there is no passenger in the front passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
Operation
When inflated
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Index
Side Airbag
44
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Continued
Index
45
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
QRG
2013 RDX
Side Airbag Cutoff System
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
Safe Driving
TOC To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
· The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front passenger seat.
Sensor that monitor the passenger's height.
· The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes on.
2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 50
Side Airbag Off Indicator
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be turned on, and the indicator will go off.
Sensor that monitor the passenger's position.
The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height and body position may not work if:
· The seat-back is wet · The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
· A seat cushion is on the seat · The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit properly restrained in a rear seat.
Index
46
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.
Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
2013 RDX
1Side Curtain Airbags If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger's side will deploy, and the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are no passengers on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
Continued
Index
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
QRG
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe angled frontal TOC collision. In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
2013 RDX
Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
Index
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
48
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
2013 RDX
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S. Canada
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passenger's weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger's seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Such as:
· An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
· A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
· The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Continued
Index
49
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators QRG
Side Airbag Off Indicator
TOC When the side airbag off indicator comes on
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
2013 RDX
1Side Airbag Off Indicator When you set the power mode to ON, the indicator should come on for a few seconds and then go out. If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Canada
This indicator comes on if the passenger's side airbag has been turned off because the passenger is too small to be sitting in the front seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has leaned into the airbag's deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured adult or a child, the indicator should go off when the passenger returns to a proper upright sitting position.
Index
50
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
2013 RDX QRG
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any 1Airbag Care
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
TOC
Safe Driving
sensors, and control unit.
When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver's seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger's seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer. For U.S. vehicles, Acura Client Service at 800-382-2238 and for Canadian vehicles, Acura Client Service at 888-9-ACURA-9.
Index
51
Child Safety
QRG Protecting Child Passengers
2013 RDX
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the TOC number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Safe Driving
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
· An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
· A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
· Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/ territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
Index
52
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
2013 RDX QRG
· Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an 1Protecting Child Passengers
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
3 WARNING
TOC
· Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Safe Driving
· Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
· Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
· Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 65
Index
53
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG Safety of Infants and Small Children
2013 RDX
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
TOC An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
3 WARNING
Safe Driving
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
rear seating position.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 37
Index
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer's instructions before installation.
54
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 RDX QRG
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
3 WARNING
TOC
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward-
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat up to age two, if the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Continued
Index
55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
2013 RDX
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
TOC Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
Safe Driving
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner's manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: · The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
· The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
· The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Index
56
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Marks
Lower Anchors Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.
Continued
Index
57
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children QRG TOC
Flexible Type
2013 RDX
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
Anchor Index
Tether Strap Hook
3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.
5. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
6. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 52
58
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 RDX QRG
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
TOC
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
Safe Driving
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
Continued
Index
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 52
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
Adding Security with a Tether
Anchor Fitting
Two tether anchorage points are provided behind the rear outer seating positions and one in the ceiling for the rear center. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security.
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
Index
60
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Using an outer anchor 1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Index
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Index
Safety of Larger Children
Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist · Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
· Does the shoulder belt cross between the child's neck and arm?
· Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs?
· Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
2013 RDX
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: · Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
· Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
· Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
· Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
2013 RDX
1Booster Seats When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
Safe Driving
QRG TOC
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
Index
63
Exhaust Gas Hazard
QRG Carbon Monoxide Gas
2013 RDX
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon TOC monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
3 WARNING
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever · The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Safe Driving
· The exhaust system may have been damaged. · The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
Index
64
Safety Labels
Label Locations
2013 RDX QRG
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully. TOC
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Safe Driving
Sun Visor U.S. models
Canadian models
Sun Visor U.S. models only
Dashboard U.S. models only
Radiator Cap
Doorjambs
U.S. models Canadian models
Index
65
QRG
Index
66
2013 RDX
2013 RDX QRG
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 68 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages...................... 78
Gauges and Multi-Information Display Gauges.............................................. 82 Multi-Information Display .................. 83
Index
67
Indicators
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when Comes on while driving - Make sure the
you set the power mode to ON,
parking brake is released. Check the brake
TOC
U.S.
then goes off. Comes on when the parking brake
fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes
Instrument Panel
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
is applied, and goes off when it is released. Comes on when the brake fluid level is low. Comes on if there is a problem with
on while driving P. 335
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 335
(Red)
the brake system. The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive with
the parking brake not fully released.
U.S.
Canada
Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with hydraulic brake boost system.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2013 RDX Message
U.S. Canada
Index
(Amber)
68
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 333
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine does not start. If "readiness codes" have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.
Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 349
Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 334
Charging System Indicator
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 333
uu Indicators u 2013 RDX QRG
Message TOC
Index
Instrument Panel
Continued 69
uu Indicators u
QRG
Indicator
Name
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator TOC
Transmission Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
Indicates current shift lever position.
2 Shifting P. 244
Blinks if the transmission system has Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
a problem.
starts and acceleration and have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2013 RDX Message
--
Instrument Panel
M (sequential Comes on when the manual
shift mode)
sequential shift mode is applied.
Indicator/Gear
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 246
--
Position
Indicator
Index
70
Indicator
Name
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on about a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 30
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.5 U.S. gal./9.2 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 259
uu Indicators u 2013 RDX QRG
Message TOC
Index
Instrument Panel
Continued 71
uu Indicators u
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Instrument Panel
Comes on for a few seconds when Stays on constantly or does not come
you set the power mode to ON,
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
then goes off.
dealer.
TOC
Supplemental Comes on if a problem with any of
Restraint System the following is detected:
Indicator
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the AWD with intelligent control system.
Blinks when the AWD with intelligent control system is overheated. The system is inactive.
Stays on constantly - the engine drives only the front wheels in this state. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - the engine drives only the front wheels in this state. Stop in a safe place, shift to (P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System* P. 253
2013 RDX Message
Index
72 * Not available on all models
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active. Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist system.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System P. 251
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) OFF Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 252
Comes on for a few seconds if you Goes off when all doors and the tailgate
set the power mode to ON, then
are closed.
goes off.
Comes on if any door or the tailgate
is not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if any door or
the tailgate is opened while driving.
uu Indicators u 2013 RDX QRG
Message TOC
--
Index
Instrument Panel
Continued 73
uu Indicators u
Instrument Panel
QRG TOC
Index
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System Indicator
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) System.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the EPS System Indicator Comes On P. 335
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the tires becomes significantly low.
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicators blink when you operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both indicators and all turn signals blink at the same time.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front Side Marker Light Bulbs P. 291
High Beam Indicator
Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.
--
2013 RDX Message
-- --
74
Indicator
Name
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator *
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.
If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
--
U.S. Canada
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when the passenger side airbag system is automatically shut off.
It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags.
Comes on when nobody is sitting in the passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat - Have the passenger sit properly.
uu Indicators u 2013 RDX QRG
Message
-- TOC
--
U.S.
Canada
Instrument Panel
Immobilizer System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
* Not available on all models
-- Index
Continued 75
uu Indicators u
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Blinks when the security system Security System alarm has been set. Alarm Indicator
2 Security System Alarm P. 113
TOC
Instrument Panel
System Message Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multi-information display appears at the same time.
While the indicator is on, press the / (information) button to see the message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message.
The multi-information display does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the / button is pressed.
CRUISE MAIN Comes on when you press the
Indicator
CRUISE button.
2 Cruise Control P. 248
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control.
2 Cruise Control P. 248
2013 RDX Message
--
--
-- --
Index
76
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Keyless Access System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. you change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the keyless access system or keyless starting system.
uu Indicators u 2013 RDX QRG
Message
TOC
Instrument Panel
Index
77
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
QRG Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
2013 RDX
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on.
/ (information) button to see the message again
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
TOC
installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 334
Instrument Panel
Appears when the washer fluid is low.
Canadian models
Refill washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 286
Appears while you are customizing the settings and the shift lever is moved out of (P.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Index
78
Message
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Condition
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE
PAST DUE follow.
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.
Explanation
2013 RDX QRG
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display P. 272 TOC
2 Overheating P. 331
Instrument Panel
Appears when there is a problem with the power
Manually open or close the power tailgate.
U.S.
tailgate system.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Canada
Index
Continued 79
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
QRG
2013 RDX
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if there is a problem with the starting system. As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
U.S.
START/STOP button for 15 seconds while depressing
the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
TOC
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Canada
Instrument Panel
Index
Appears after you unlock and open the driver's door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 240
Appears three seconds after the TO START ENGINE message appears.
2 Starting the Engine P. 240
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
80
Message
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
2013 RDX QRG
Condition
Explanation
Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.
moving the shift lever to (P.
TOC
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. --
Instrument Panel
Appears after the driver's door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the keyless access remote inside the vehicle.
The message goes off when you bring the keyless access remote back inside the vehicle, and close the door.
2 Keyless Access Remote Reminder P. 121
Appears when the keyless access remote battery becomes weak.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 311
Appears if the keyless access remote's battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not with you when starting the engine. A beeper sounds six times.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 326
Index
81
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
QRG Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
2013 RDX
Speedometer
TOC Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Instrument Panel
Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
Index
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 331
82
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
2013 RDX QRG
Switching the Display
TOC
Press the
/ (information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the
display.
Instrument Panel
Black Screen
Average Fuel Economy/ Instant Fuel Economy
Range
/ Button
Customize Settings
Elapsed Time
SEL/RESET Button
Engine Oil Life
Tire Pressure for Each Tire
Average Speed
Index
Continued 83
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
Odometer
Trip A
Trip B
TOC
Outside Temperature
Instrument Panel
SEL/RESET Button
Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.
Index
84
2013 RDX
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
2013 RDX QRG
Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
Instrument Panel
Resetting a trip meter
TOC
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.
1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 87
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change the way the average fuel economy is reset.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Index
Continued
85
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
2013 RDX
Instrument Panel
TOC Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
1Elapsed Time
You can change the way the elapsed time is reset. 2 Customized Features P. 87
Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
1Average Speed
You can change the way the average speed is reset. 2 Customized Features P. 87
Tire Pressure Monitor
Shows each tire's pressure.
2 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 253
Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 271
Index
86
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Customized Features
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
How to customize
Select the CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS screen by pressing the
/
the power mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
button while
2013 RDX
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
/
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 90
2 Example of customization settings P. 93
Customization is possible when you see the driver's ID (DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2) on the screen. The driver's ID indicates which remote transmitter you have used to unlock the driver's door. The customized settings are recalled every time you unlock the driver's door with that remote.
QRG TOC
Instrument Panel
When you customize settings: Shift to (P
Multi-Information Display: Goes to customize settings.
/ Button: Changes the customize menus and items.
SEL/RESET button: Enters the selected item
Index
Continued
87
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
Customization flow
Press the
/ button.
CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS SEL/RESET TOC
METER SETUP
SEL/RESET
Instrument Panel
3 4
DRIVING POSITION SETUP SEL/RESET
3 4
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP SEL/RESET
3 4
LIGHTING SETUP
SEL/RESET
3
4
3
4
Index
88
DOOR SETUP
3 4
SEL/RESET
2013 RDX
LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
"TRIP A" RESET TIMING "TRIP B" RESET TIMING KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS
MEMORY POSITION LINK
DOOR UNLOCK MODE KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
2013 RDX QRG
3 4
POWER TAILGATE SETUP* SEL/RESET
POWER TAILGATE KEYLESS OPEN MODE
TOC
Instrument Panel
3 4
SEL/RESET
3 4
MAINTENANCE INFO.
3 4
DEFAULT ALL
3 4
EXIT
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
89
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
List of customizable options
2013 RDX
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the displayed language.
ENGLISH*/FRENCH/SPANISH
TOC
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
-5°F ~ ±0°F* ~ +5°F (U.S.) Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-3°C ~ ±0°C* ~ +3°C (Canada)
Instrument Panel
METER SETUP
"TRIP A" RESET TIMING "TRIP B" RESET TIMING
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.
WITH REFUEL/IGN OFF/ MANUALLY RESET*
WITH REFUEL/IGN OFF/ MANUALLY RESET*
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS
Displays the keyless start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.
ON*/OFF
DRIVING POSITION SETUP
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the driver's seat position to a stored setting.
ON*/OFF
*: Default Setting
Index
90
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
2013 RDX QRG
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver's door handle.
DRIVER DOOR ONLY*/ALL DOORS
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors.
ON*/OFF
TOC
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab the either front door handle.
ON*/OFF
Instrument Panel
LIGHTING SETUP
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.
60 sec/30 sec*/15 sec 60 sec/30 sec/15 sec*/0 sec
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
MAX/HIGH/MID*/LOW/MIN
*: Default Setting
Index
Continued 91
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
2013 RDX
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
WITH VEH SPD*2/SHIFT FROM (P /OFF
Instrument Panel
TOC
DOOR SETUP
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK DOOR LOCK MODE
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote.
DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to (P *2/ALL DOORS with SHIFT to (P/DRIVER DOOR with IGN OFF/ALL DOORS with IGN OFF/OFF
DRIVER DOOR*2/ALL DOOR
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON*2/OFF
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER the security system to set after you unlock the
90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*2
vehicle without opening any door.
POWER TAILGATE SETUP*1
POWER TAILGATE KEYLESS OPEN MODE
Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens.
ANYTIME*2 / WHEN UNLOCKED
MAINTENA NCE INFO.
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
RESET/CANCEL
Index
DEFAULT ALL
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.
CANCEL/SET
*1:Not available on all models *2: Default Setting
92
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the "TRIP A" RESET TIMING setting to WITH REFUEL are
shown below. The default setting for "TRIP A" RESET TIMING is MANUALLY
RESET.
1. Press
/ button to select
CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS, then press the
SEL/RESET button.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Instrument Panel
2. Press the
/ button until METER
SETUP appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button. u LANGUAGE SELECTION appears first in the display.
Continued
Index
93
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
QRG
4. Press the
/ button until "TRIP A"
RESET TIMING appears on the display,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
TOC
can select WITH REFUEL, IGN OFF,
MANUALLY RESET, or EXIT.
Instrument Panel
5. Press the / button and select WITH REFUEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The WITH REFUEL setup screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
Index
6. Press the
/ button until EXIT
appears on the display, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.
94
2013 RDX
2013 RDX QRG
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock ................................ 96 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 97 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ............................................ 99 Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength..... 103 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ... 104 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 105 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 106 Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 107 Security System ................................ 113 Immobilizer System .......................... 113 Security System Alarm...................... 113
* Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 115 Opening and Closing the Moonroof ....... 118 Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 119 Turn Signals ..................................... 122 Light Switches.................................. 122 Fog Lights* ...................................... 125 Daytime Running Lights ................... 125 Wipers and Washers ........................ 126 Brightness Control ........................... 128 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ...129 Driving Position Memory System ...... 130
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 132 Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 133
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 133 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 134 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 136 Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 136 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items...... 143 Interior Lights .................................. 143 Interior Convenience Items .............. 145 Climate Control System ................... 152 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 152 Synchronized Mode ......................... 154 Automatic Climate Control Sensors.....155
Index
95
Setting the Clock
Controls
QRG TOC
Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON. Using the SETUP button
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Adjust Clock, then press .
3. Rotate to select the item you want to change (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute). Then press .
4. Rotate to make the adjustment.
5. Press to enter your selection. The display returns to Adjust Clock. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to adjust other items.
6. To enter the selection, Rotate and select Set, then press .
7. Press the SETUP button to go back to the normal display.
2013 RDX
1Clock These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until Adjust Clock appears, then press the (6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Index
96
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Keys
HOLD
Use the keyless access remote to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. You can also use the keyless access system to lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.
Keyless access remote
Release Button
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate when the keyless access remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.
2013 RDX
1Key Types and Functions
All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 113
The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics:
· Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
· Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. · Keep the keys away from liquids. · Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the keyless access system may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
Controls
QRG TOC
Built-in Key
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while pressing the release button. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless access remote until it clicks.
Index
Continued
97
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
QRG
Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
TOC
2013 RDX
1Key Number Tag Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.
Controls
Index
98
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 RDX
Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Unlock Button
Locking the doors
Lock Button
Press the lock button. Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors
HOLD
and tailgate lock, and the security system
sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set.
Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button.
Once: uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter or keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 87
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 143
Twice: uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
Continued
99
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
QRG
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
Unlock
2013 RDX
1Using the Remote Transmitter The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or the tailgate is open.
Controls
TOC
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 311
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
a
b
Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 87
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver's door with a key, all of the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 87
Index
Lockout prevention system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the keyless access remote is inside the vehicle, and any door or the tailgate is open.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Make sure you have the key with you when locking a door from the outside.
100
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Keyless Access System
When you carry the keyless access remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the tailgate within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the tailgate release button.
Door Lock Button
Locking the doors and tailgate Press the door lock button on the front door or the tailgate.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets.
2013 RDX
1Using the Keyless Access System
· The driver must carry the keyless access remote and
not leave it in the vehicle when you get out.
· A person who is not carrying the keyless access
remote can lock/unlock the doors if a person who is carrying it is within range.
· The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless access remote is within range.
· If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
· The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
· The driver must carry the keyless access remote and
not leave it in the vehicle when you get out.
· A person who is not carrying the keyless access
remote can unlock the tailgate if a person who is carrying it is within range.
Controls
QRG TOC
Lock Button
Continued
Index
101
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
QRG
TOC Tailgate Release Button
2013 RDX
Unlocking the doors and tailgate Grab the driver's door handle:
uThe driver's door unlocks. uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger's door handle: uAll the doors unlock. uSome exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate release button: uThe tailgate unlocks and opens. uSome exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.
2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button P. 108
1Using the Keyless Access System
· Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless access remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
· The keyless access remote may not operate if it is
too close to the door and door glass.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be customized using the multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Index
102
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
2013 RDX QRG
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless access remote when locking/ 1Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or to start the engine.
Communication between the keyless access remote
and the vehicle consumes the keyless access remote's
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors or opening the tailgate or
battery.
starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: · Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
The keyless access remote battery lasts about two years. This changes by how often you use the remote.
· You are carrying the keyless access remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless access
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
TOC
· A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless access remote.
personal computers.
Controls
Index
103
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
QRG Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Using the Lock Tab
To Lock
Lock Tab
Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.
To Unlock TOC
Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.
2013 RDX
1Using the Lock Tab When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
Controls
Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle. uThe door unlocks and opens in one motion.
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 105
Index
104
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
2013 RDX QRG
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.
Unlock
When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.
Lock
Controls
TOC Index
105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
QRG Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver's door automatically when a certain condition is met.
Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
2013 RDX
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 87
Controls
TOC Auto Door Unlocking
Park unlock mode The driver's door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Index
106
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
2013 RDX QRG
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
closing it.
Models with power tailgate
Opening the tailgate · Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may come down accidentally by its own weight.
· Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Closing the tailgate Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage. uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 64
3 WARNING
Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury.
Make sure everyone is clear before
TOC
closing the tailgate.
Controls
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the gate.
When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.
Index
107
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button
QRG Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button
2013 RDX 1Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate.
Do not leave the keyless access remote inside the cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.
Controls
TOC Tailgate Release
Button
To manually close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.
Inner Handle
Index
108
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate switch on the dashboard, or pressing the button on the tailgate.
The power tailgate can be opened when: · The tailgate is fully closed. · The shift lever is in (P.
· Press and hold the tailgate button on the remote transmitter for about one second. uIf you have changed the POWER TAILGATE KEYLESS OPEN MODE setting to WHEN UNLOCKED, you need to unlock the tailgate before you press the tailgate button to open it.
2 Customized Features P. 87
The power tailgate can be closed when: · The tailgate is fully open.
· The shift lever is in (P.
· Press and hold the tailgate button on the remote transmitter for about one second.
2013 RDX
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate* The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions:
· The vehicle is parked on a steep hill. · The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind. · The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.
If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.
Installing aftermarket components other than Acura genuine accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your luggage in and out.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle.
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
Continued
109
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
QRG
Remote Transmitter
2013 RDX
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate.
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times.
To reverse direction while the power tailgate is
Power
in operation, press the button again. The
TOC
Tailgate Button
beeper sounds three times and the tailgate reverses direction.
Controls
Customizing when to open the tailgate ANYTIME: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting. WHEN UNLOCKED: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.
2 Customized Features P. 87
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.
Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.
Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.
Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the tailgate button on the dashboard for about one second. The beeper sounds and some exterior lights flash.
Index
Power Tailgate Button
To reverse direction while the power tailgate is in operation, press the button again. The beeper sounds three times and the tailgate reverses direction.
110 * Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
2013 RDX QRG
Power Tailgate Close Button
Press the button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is closing, it stops and reverses direction.
1Power Tailgate Close Button
If you push the power tailgate close button while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the power tailgate operation stops. Use caution if the tailgate stops in the middle of either operation. It may suddenly swing up or down.
TOC
Power Tailgate Close Button
Controls
Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.
1Auto-Closer The auto-closer feature does not activate if you push the tailgate release button while the power tailgate is closing.
Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.
Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.
Index
* Not available on all models
Continued
111
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
QRG TOC
Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode
The power tailgate fail-safe mode detects if there is an extra load on the tailgate (for example, it is covered with snow). If an extra load is detected, the tailgate opens completely then lowers to the close position.
2013 RDX
1Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fail-safe mode may activate.
Once the power tailgate fail-safe mode activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.
If the power tailgate fail-safe mode constantly activates, consult at a dealer.
Controls
Index
112 * Not available on all models
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when selecting the ACCESSORY mode with the ENGINE START/STOP button: · Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button. · Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. · Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system with the keyless
access remote.
2013 RDX
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
QRG
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
TOC
vehicle inoperable.
Controls
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened without the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system.
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and all of the exterior lights flash.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Index
Continued
113
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
QRG
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: · The power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). · The hood is closed. · All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or keyless access system.
TOC When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
2013 RDX
1Security System Alarm Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when unlocking the door with the lock tab.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it.
Panic Mode
Index
Panic Button
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: · The horn sounds.
· Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
114
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
Driver's Window Switch
ON OFF Power Window Lock Button
Indicator
Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
Front Passenger's Window Switch
Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
2013 RDX QRG
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Controls
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
TOC
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The driver's window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
Index
Continued
115
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
QRG
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Close
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
TOC
Open
2013 RDX
Controls
Index
116
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
Unlock Button
To open: Press the UNLOCK button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Controls
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key
Close
Open
To open: Unlock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Index
117
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
Open
release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
Close Tilt
The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
2013 RDX
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
118
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button Changing the Power Mode
Indicator
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off. The steering wheel is locked. The power to all electrical components is turned off.
2013 RDX QRG
1ENGINE START/STOP Button ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range Operating Range
TOC
Controls
ACCESSORY Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
ON Indicator in the button is on. All electrical components can be used.
: Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to change the mode. : Press the button without the shift lever in (P. : Shift to Park, then press the button.
Continued
You can start the engine when the keyless access remote is inside the vehicle. The engine may also run if the keyless access remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the keyless access remote battery is weak, beeper sounds and the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON message appears on the multiinformation display.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 326
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.
Index
119
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
QRG
Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver's door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.
TOC
2013 RDX
Controls
Index
120
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Keyless Access Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/ and outside the vehicle to remind you that the keyless access remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it within its operational range.
When the power mode is in ON If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the driver's door is closed, warning buzzers sound from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the multi-information display notifies the driver inside that the remote is out.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY or in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the driver's door is closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.
2013 RDX
1Keyless Access Remote Reminder When the keyless access remote is within the system's operational range, and the driver's door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/ STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/ STOP button.
Removing the keyless access remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put a keyless access remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system's operational range.
Controls
QRG TOC
Index
121
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
QRG Turn Signals
Right Turn
Left Turn TOC
The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.
One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.
2013 RDX
Controls
Light Switches Manual Operation
High Beams
Index
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting.
High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.
Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
1Light Switches If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Models with high voltage discharge tube bulb
Repeatedly turning the headlights on and off reduces the life of the HID headlight bulbs. If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
122
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
2013 RDX QRG
Automatic Lighting Control
Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.
1Automatic Lighting Control
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
When you turn the light switch to #Y, the The light sensor is in the location shown below.
headlights and other exterior lights will switch Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
on and off automatically depending on the
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
ambient brightness.
work properly.
TOC
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity setting.
Light Sensor
2 Customized Features P. 87
Controls
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
Bright
Dark
Index
Continued
123
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
QRG
2013 RDX
Headlight Integration with Wiper
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within certain number of intervals while the headlight switch is in #Y.The headlights automatically go off a few minutes after the wipers are stopped.
1Headlight Integration with Wiper*
This feature activates while the headlights are in #Y. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
If the ambient light is dark, the automatic lighting
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
control overrides this feature, and the headlights come on whether or not the wipers cycle several
TOC The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
times.
within 15 seconds after the door is opened and closed with the power mode in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Controls
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the #Y position).
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 87
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Index
124 * Not available on all models
Fog Lights*
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
2013 RDX
1Fog Lights* The fog lights go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on.
QRG
Fog Light Switch
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met:
· The power mode is in ON.
· The headlight switch is off, or in
.
· The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.
* Not available on all models
Controls
TOC
Index
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
QRG TOC
Wipers and Washers Front Wiper/Washer
Pull to use washer.
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring
a b c d e
a MIST b OFF c INT: Low speed with intermittent d LO: Low speed wipe
e HI: High speed wipe
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.
MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Adjusting the delay Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay.
Long delay
Short delay
2013 RDX
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
Index
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever, the wipers make two or three more sweeps before stopping.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
126
Rear Wiper/Washer
d b a
c
d
a INT: Intermittent b ON: Continuous wipe c OFF d Washer
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
The rear wiper and washer can be used when the power mode is in ON.
2013 RDX
1Wipers and Washers If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
QRG
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then remove the obstacle.
TOC
Controls
Washer ( )
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.
Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Front Wiper Position
Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent)
Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
Index
127
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
QRG TOC
Brightness Control
Control Knob
2013 RDX
When the power mode is in ON, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The multiinformation display will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the multiinformation display while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
When it is bright outside and the headlight integration with the wiper is activated, the instrument panel brightness does not change.
Pressing the display.
(SEL/RESET) knob switches the
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, a beep sound. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on.
Index
128
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 0°C or below, they do not automatically switch off.
2013 RDX
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
QRG TOC
Controls
Index
129
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
QRG Driving Position Memory System
2013 RDX
You can store two driver's seat and door mirror positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the driver's door with a remote transmitter, the seat and door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.
1Driving Position Memory System
Using the multi-information display, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 87
The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle when you enter.
TOC · Driver 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
· Driver 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
Driver 1
Driver 2
Controls
Index
130
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
SET Button
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the driver's seat and the door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button. uYou will hear a beep, and the memory button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button. uOnce the seat and the door mirrors position has been memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.
2013 RDX
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:
· You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
· You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep.
· You readjust the door mirrors. · You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Controls
QRG TOC
Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
1. Move the shift lever to (P. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).
uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink.
SET Button
The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When they have finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you:
· Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2 ).
· Adjust the seat position. · Adjust the door mirrors. · Shift into any position except (P.
Index
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
QRG Adjusting the Steering Wheel
2013 RDX
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
To adjust
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column.
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
TOC
in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
Controls
To lock
Lever
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down to lock the steering wheel in position.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wdohweenl, iinn,palancde obuyt.trying to move it up,
Index
132
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
2013 RDX QRG
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving 1Adjusting the Mirrors
position.
Keep the inside and door mirrors clean and adjusted
for best visibility.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
When driving after dark, the automatic
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 136
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
button to turn this function on and off. When The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
TOC
activated, the auto indicator comes on.
position is in (R.
Controls
Indicator
Sensor Auto Button
Index
133
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
QRG Power Door Mirrors
Adjustment
TOC
Switch
Selector Switch
You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
Controls
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Selector Switch
If activated, either side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle when reversing. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you shift out of (R.
Index
To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left or right side.
134
2013 RDX
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Inner Segment
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner segments. The outer segment is slightly curved to provide a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror. This wider view may help you check areas that are not visible using a standard door mirror.
Outer Segment
2013 RDX
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
QRG TOC
Controls
Index
135
Adjusting the Seats
QRG Adjusting the Seat Positions
2013 RDX
Allow sufficient space.
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
well back in the seat and be able to
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
adequately press the pedals without leaning
in serious injury or death if the front
forward, and grip the steering wheel
airbags inflate.
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far Always sit as far back from the front
TOC
Move back. back from the front airbag in the dashboard
airbags as possible while maintaining
as possible.
control of the vehicle.
Controls
Adjusting the front power seats
Horizontal Position Adjustment
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only)
Index
Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's seat only)
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
136
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
2013 RDX
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
Controls
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
137
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
2013 RDX
Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear-
reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Controls
TOC
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.
Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
For the head restraint system to work properly:
· Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
· Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
· Install each restraint in its proper location.
while pressing the release button.
Index
138
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position
A passenger sitting in a center back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Controls
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
Index
Continued
139
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
QRG
2013 RDX
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if TOC an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Controls
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
Index
140
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats
Folding Down the Rear Seats
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for cargo.
To fold down the seat 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 34
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back.
From the rear door side
4. Pull the release lever.
Pull
2013 RDX
1Folding Down the Rear Seats Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.
When you fold down one side of the rear seats and use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard.
The front seats must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
Controls
QRG TOC
Lever
From the cargo area side
4. Pull the release lever.
Continued
Index
141
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest QRG
2013 RDX
To return the seat to the original position
Pull up the seat-back in the upright position.
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.
Controls
TOC
Armrest Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
Index
142
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
Interior Light Switches
Front Door Activated Position
Rear Off
Off On
On
Door Activated Position
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: · When any of the doors are opened. · You unlock the driver's door. · When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the button.
2013 RDX
1Interior Light Switches In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations:
· When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
· When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
QRG TOC
Controls
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 87
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:
· When you lock the driver's door. · When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
· When you set the power mode to ON.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
1Map Lights
When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the button.
Index
Continued
143
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
QRG
Cargo Area Lights
On Off
TOC
ON The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed.
OFF The light stays off with or without opening the tailgate.
2013 RDX
Controls
Index
144
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Press the button to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the built-in key.
To Lock Glove Box
1Glove Box
2013 RDX QRG
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
TOC
Controls
Removable shelf The shelf in the glove box is detachable. To remove it, disengage the tabs.
Shelf Tab
The removed shelf can be stored upside down in the glove box.
Index
Continued
145
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console compartment.
Controls
TOC
Slide the lid using the release knob to open or close the console compartment.
Index
146
2013 RDX
Beverage Holders
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.
2013 RDX
1Beverage Holders NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
QRG
TOC
Controls
Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.
Continued
Index
147
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.
Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the lid and the cover to use it.
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.
Controls
Accessory power socket (console compartment)
Pull the handle and open the cover to use it.
When each socket is being used simultaneously, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 120 watts (10 amps).
Index
148
Coat Hooks
Cargo Hooks
Hooks
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle of both sides. Pull it down to use it.
2013 RDX
1Coat Hooks The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
QRG
TOC
Controls
Use floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the cargo area.
Hooks
Continued
Index
149
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
Sunglasses Holder
2013 RDX
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
Push
items in this holder.
TOC
Controls
Index
150
Seat Heaters
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. uThe appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm.
2013 RDX QRG
1Seat Heaters
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
TOC
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Controls
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.
Index
151
Climate Control System
Controls
QRG TOC
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Dashboard vents Dashboard and Floor vents floor vents
Floor and defroster vents
AUTO Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side control
dial.
3. Press the
button to cancel.
2013 RDX
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in AUTO, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on AUTO, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Index
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
152
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Pressing the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
2013 RDX
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
QRG
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
TOC If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
Controls
To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the
2. Press the
button. button.
1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
Index
153
Controls
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
QRG Synchronized Mode
TOC
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronized mode. 1. Press the SYNC button.
uThe system will switch to synchronized mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using driver's side temperature control dial. Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
2013 RDX
1Synchronized Mode When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately.
Models with navigation system
In AUTO mode, the system adjusts each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun position updated by the navigation system's GPS.
Index
154
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor
The automatic climate control system is equipped with a sunlight sensor, and an interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC Temperature Sensor
Controls
Index
155
QRG
Index
156
2013 RDX
2013 RDX QRG
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features on models without the navigation system.
Audio System About Your Audio System................ 158 USB Adapter Cable .......................... 159 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 159 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 160
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 161 Audio/Information Screen* .............. 162 Audio Remote Controls.................... 165 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 166 Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 167 Playing the XM® Radio ..................... 169 Playing a CD .................................... 171 Playing an iPod®............................... 174
* Not available on all models
Playing Pandora® ............................. 177 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 179 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 182 Wallpaper Setup .............................. 184 Display Setup ................................... 186 Audio Error Messages ...................... 187 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 190 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Training HomeLink........................... 194 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Using HFL ........................................ 196 HFL Menus....................................... 198
Compass* .......................................... 225
Index
157
Audio System
QRG About Your Audio System
2013 RDX
On models with navigation system, see Navigation System Manual for operation of the audio system, Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these features.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPod®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.
1About Your Audio System XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on XM® Radio, contact a dealer. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 190
XM® Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
TOC
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
Features
iPod®
iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Remote Control
USB Flash Drive
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Index
158
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode.
2013 RDX
1USB Adapter Cable
· Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
· Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
· Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
· Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
· We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
· Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/ ipod.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the AUX button.
Features
QRG TOC
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system.
Index
159
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
QRG Audio System Theft Protection
2013 RDX
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as 1Audio System Theft Protection
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner's manual kit.
Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system. u If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the
We recommend that you write down the serial number in this owner's manual.
audio security code. See step 3.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
then obtain the code.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system's control unit recognizes that
TOC
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio/
You can find out about your serial number and security code from a dealer.
Features
information screen.
U.S. models
3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.
You can register the security code at My Acura (owners.acura.com.), and find information on how to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at radio-navicode.acura.com.
Index
160
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the selector knob or SETUP button to access some audio functions.
BACK Button
SETUP Button
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Button Selector Knob Menu Display
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such as the RDS Information, Sound Settings, Play Mode, Resume/Pause, or Adjust Clock.
BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.
2013 RDX
1Audio System Basic Operation These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Press the MODE, (+, (-, 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 165
Setup Menu Items 2 Radio Data System (RDS) P. 168 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 166 2 How to Select a Play Mode P. 173 2 To pause or resume a file P. 183 2 Setting the Clock P. 96
Features
QRG TOC
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. The brightness can be set differently for the day time and night time.
Press once for the day time mode. Press twice for the night time mode. Adjust the brightness using .
Index
161
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen* Models without navigation system
QRG Audio/Information Screen*
Displays audio status and wallpaper. It allows you to go to various setup options.
Switching the Display
Press DISPLAY button. Rotate and select the mode from the three display modes. Press .
TOC
Features
Index
162 * Not available on all models
Display Button
Selector Knob
2013 RDX
Audio Display
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 161
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
2013 RDX QRG
Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 184
Minimum Display
Minimizes the display by only showing the compass, audio status, and clock on the
TOC
display.
Features
Setting Options
1. Press SETUP button.
2. Rotate and select the setup option you want to change. Press .
Continued
Index
163
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*
QRG
Language Selection
1. Rotate to select Language Selection, then press .
2. Rotate to select the language, then press .
TOC
Features
Index
164
2013 RDX
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls
2013 RDX QRG
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
MODE Button
MODE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM XM1 XM2 CD AUX
VOL (Volume) Button
CH (Channel) Button
VOL Button Press 3 : Increases the volume.
Press 4 : Decreases the volume.
1Audio Remote Controls The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in the AUX mode, the following are operable from the remote controls:
· iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
· Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
CH Button · When listening to the radio
Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station. Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station. Press and hold (+: Selects the next strong station. Press and hold (-: Selects the previous strong station.
· When listening to a CD, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press (+: Skips to the next song. Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
· When listening to a CD or USB flash drive Press and hold (+: Skips to the next folder. Press and hold (-: Goes back to the previous folder.
· When listening to Pandora®* Press (+: Skips to the next song. Press and hold (+: Selects the next station. Press and hold (-: Selects the previous station.
Features
TOC Index
* Not available on all models
165
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
QRG Adjusting the Sound
SETUP Button
2013 RDX
Press the SETUP button, and rotate to select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
Bass TOC
Treble
Features
Fader
Balance
Index
Treble is selectable.
Subwoofer
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
166
Playing the AM/FM Radio
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an RDS category. FM/AM Button Press to select a band. SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again.
BACK Buttons Press to go back to the previous display. Selector Knob Press and turn to tune the radio frequency.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
2013 RDX QRG
SKIP Bar Press to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
A.SEL (Auto Select) Button Press to scan both bands and store the strongest station in each preset.To turn off auto select, press the button again. This restores the presets you originally set.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Features
TOC Index
Continued 167
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Features
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
RDS information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate to select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS Information switches between on and off.
1Playing the AM/FM Radio The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Pressing the MODE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 165
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.
To find an RDS station from your selected program category
RDS Category
1. Press the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category.
2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.
A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
Index
168
Playing the XM® Radio
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
(XM®) Button Press to select XM® Radio. CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XM® Radio category. SCAN Button Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode), or channels within a category (in the category mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel. BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
2013 RDX QRG
Preset Buttons (1-6)
TOC
To store a channel:
Features
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored channel, select XM, then press the preset button.
SKIP Bar
Press or to the previous or next channel.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select channels.
Index
Continued 169
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
QRG
To Play the XM® Radio
1. Press the
button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press the SETUP button, rotate to select XM Mode, and press . Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or Preset buttons.
To Select a Channel from a List
TOC
1. Press to display a channel list.
2. Rotate to select a channel, then press
.
2013 RDX
1Playing the XM® Radio In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
Features
Index
170
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 RDX QRG
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. Press to sample all tracks on the CD
(all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to sample the first file in each of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC). To turn off scan, press the button.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
TOC
Features
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
CD Button Press to play a CD.
SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Index
Continued 171
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG
2013 RDX
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
TOC Folder Selection
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances:
· When you select a new folder, file, or track. · When you change the audio mode to CD. · When you insert a CD.
Features
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
Track Selection Index
172
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the SETUP button.
2013 RDX
1How to Select a Play Mode Press the BACK button to go back to the previous display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this setting mode.
QRG
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then
Play Mode Menu Items
press .
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Play Mode
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
TOC
Items
Features
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . 3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
Index
173
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 159
Album Art
TOC
Features
Index
174
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
2013 RDX
USB Indicator Comes on when an iPod® is connected.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected). SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 RDX QRG
How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press to display the iPod® menu. 2. Rotate to select a menu.
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
3. Press to display the items on that menu. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 188
TOC iPod® Menu
Features
Continued
Index
175
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
QRG TOC
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Play Mode Items
2013 RDX
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track. Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode. Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
Features
Index
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . 3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
176
U.S. models iPhone® use only
Playing Pandora®
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 159
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
2013 RDX QRG
Rating Icon
Album Art
TOC
Features
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to the next station. Press (- to the previous station.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
AUX Button Press to select iPhone® (if connected when the Pandora® application is activated).
SKIP Bar Press to skip a song.
Selector Knob Press to enter PANDORA MENU. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Index
Continued 177
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicle's audio system. The available items are: · Station List (QuickMix is also available) · Like · Dislike · Resume/Pause · SKIP · Bookmark this song · Bookmark this artist
Operating a menu item
1. Press to display the PANDORA MENU. 2. Rotate to select a menu. 3. Press to display the items on that menu.
1Playing Pandora® Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your iPhone®. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 189
You can skip the song or select Dislike only a predetermined number of times in an hour.
Index
178
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 159
2013 RDX QRG
USB Indicator
Comes on when a USB flash drive is connected.
CATEGORY Bar Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each file. Press to sample all files in the
current folder. To turn off scan, press the button. Press and hold to sample the first file in each of the main folders. To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
SKIP Bar Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Features
TOC Index
Continued 179
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list. 2. Rotate to select a folder. 3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
Folder Selection
1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 190
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 188
Features
Track Selection Index
180
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 RDX QRG
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
Play Mode Menu Items Normal Play
1. Press the SETUP button.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then
folder.
press .
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Play Mode
TOC
Items
Features
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the SETUP button. 2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . 3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
Index
181
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 203
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Features
TOC VOL/ (Power/ volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
AUX Button
Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.
2013 RDX
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
Index
Preset 1 Button
Press to switch the mode between pause and resume.
182
SKIP Bar Press or to change files.
SETUP Button Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob Press to display the device's name.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 RDX QRG
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
To pause or resume a file 1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press . Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
TOC
from your phone.
Features
Switching to HFL
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 196
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Button Button
Press the (hang-up) button to end the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Index
183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWallpaper Setup
Features
QRG TOC Index
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Models with navigation system
See the navigation system manual for how to change the wallpaper.
Import Wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter cable.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 159
2. Press the SETUP button. 3. Rotate to select Display Setup, then
press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then
press . 5. Rotate to select Import, then press . 6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then
press . 7. The preview of the imported data is
displayed. 8. Press to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear. Then the display will return to the import wallpaper list.
9. Rotate to select the place to save the data, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
2013 RDX
1Wallpaper Setup
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· Images between 1,680 x 936 (display's maximum
image size) and 420 x 234 pixels in size can be displayed in full screen.
· The number of files that can be selected is up
to 255.
· Up to 64 characters can be displayed in the file
name.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, No compatible images were found. See Owner's Manual. will appear.
184
Select Wallpaper
1. Rotate to select Select on the wallpaper setup menu, then press . u The screen will change to the wallpaper list.
2. Rotate to select desired wallpaper and press . u The confirmation message will appear. Then the display will return to the wallpaper setup menu.
Delete Wallpaper
1. Rotate to select Delete on the wallpaper setup menu, then press . u The screen will change to the delete wallpaper list.
2. Rotate to select wallpaper that you want to delete and press . u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely. u The confirmation message will appear.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWallpaper Setup 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Features
Index
185
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
QRG Display Setup
You can change brightness or color theme on the audio/information screen.
Brightness
TOC
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Display Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press press .
4. Rotate to adjust the setting.
Features
Color Theme
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Display Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then press . Rotate to setting you want, then press .
Index
186
2013 RDX
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
2013 RDX QRG
Error Message
Cause
Solution
Unplayable File
Track/file format not supported
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically.
Bad Disc Please check owners manual. Push Eject
Mecha Error
Mechanical error
Bad Disc Please check owners manual.
Servo error
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 192
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
TOC
Features
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check Disc
Disc error
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 192
Index
187
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
QRG iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
2013 RDX
Error Message
Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device Please Check Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
Owners Manual.
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No Song
Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
TOC Unsupported Ver
Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected, update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Features
Retry Connection
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device.
Index
188
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
PANDORA No Station
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Requires Update Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.
PANDORA Unavailable
Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.
PANDORA Cannot Connect Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
PANDORA Loading...
Appears when Pandora is loading.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Features
Index
189
General Information on the Audio System
QRG XM® Radio Service
2013 RDX
Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM® website to subscribe.
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio: US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 8529696 Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877) 209-0079
Features
TOC Index
Receiving XM® Radio
Press the
(XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
XM® Radio Display Messages
Loading...: XM® is loading the audio or program information.
Channel Off Air: The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Channel Not Authorized: XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. --------:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
Check Antenna: There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:
· In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
· In tunnels · On the lower level of a multi-tiered road · Large items carried on the roof rack
190
Recommended CDs
· Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. · Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. · Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
2013 RDX
1Recommended CDs A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.
QRG
CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
TOC
Features
· Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
· Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
Continued
Index
191
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
QRG
Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: · Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. · When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. · Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. · Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. · Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. · Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
TOC · Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
2013 RDX
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples: Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
With Label/ Using
Sticker
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
Damaged CDs
Poor quality CDs
Features
Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs
Warped
Burrs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Index
192
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives
iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility
Model iPod ® (5th generation) iPod classic ® 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic ® 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic ® 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano ® (1st to 6th generation*) *launch in 2010 iPod touch ® (1st to 4th generation*) *launch in 2010 iPhone ® 3G/iPhone ® 3GS/iPhone ® 4
USB Flash Drives
· Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. · Some digital audio players may not be compatible. · Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. · Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
2013 RDX
1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
QRG
Features
TOC 1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
Index
193
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
QRG
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
2013 RDX
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls., Inc.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an "electronic eye," or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the TOC way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door's path.
Features
Training HomeLink
Red Indicator
Index
If you have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes. To do this:
· Press and hold the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
· If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
194
uuHomeLink® Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink
Training a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on the remote transmitter.Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?
YES
NO
NO
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
YES
NO
a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
YES
continuing to hold the HomeLink button, press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
Training Complete
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink LED is on.
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs, then remains on.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the "learn" button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
2013 RDX
1Training HomeLink Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
QRG
Standard transmitter
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for 2 secs, then remains on for about 23 secs.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under "Training a Button."
Features
TOC
Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device's instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
Index
195
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
QRG
Models with navigation system
For models with navigation system, see Navigation System Manual for how to operate Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL HFL Buttons
TOC Volume up
Microphone
Features
Pick-up Button Hang-up Button
Volume down
PHONE Button
Back Button TALK Button
Selector Knob
Index
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (TALK) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Back) button: Press to cancel a command. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
196
2013 RDX
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Roam Status Signal Strength Battery Level Status HFL Mode
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
2013 RDX
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
QRG
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
TOC 1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
Features
Call Name
Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Language Selection P. 164
Disabled Option
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 213
Index
197
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL. PHONE or
PHONE
Speed Dial*1 Display your speed dial entry lists. (up to 15 entries per paired phone)
Call History*1
Dialed Calls Display the last 20
TOC
outgoing calls.
Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Features
Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls.
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone's phonebook.
2013 RDX
1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Index
Dial*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 198
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
Redial
Redial the last number dialed in the phone's history.
Select message and .
Text Message
Message is read aloud
Read/Stop reading System reads received message
aloud, or stop message from being
read.
TOC
Reply
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Features
Call
Make a call to the sender.
Display Message
See an entire received message (if more than three lines of text).
Index
Continued 199
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
Phone Setup
Connection
TOC
2013 RDX
Add a New Phone Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a Phone Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect Phone
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a Phone
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pairing Code
Create a code for a paired phone.
Index
200
Speed Dial*1
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
Add New Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number
Enter a phone number to store as
a speed dial number.
Existing entry list
TOC
Change Speed Dial Change a previously stored speed dial number.
Features
Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Index
Continued 201
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
2013 RDX
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Caller ID Info
Name Priority
Prioritize the caller's name as the caller ID.
TOC
Number Priority Prioritize the caller's phone number
as the caller ID.
Passcode*1
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Features
Text Message Notice
Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.
Index
System Clear
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 202
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
1Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
Phone Pairing Tips:
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
· Up to six phones can be paired.
discoverable mode, then press .
· Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth device.
paired to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
TOC
Features
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
time out and returns to idle.
it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to input on your phone. When your phone prompts you, input the four-digit pairing code.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Index
Continued
203
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Connection, then press
TOC
.
4. Rotate to select Add a New Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to Select Location.
Features
5. Rotate to select Empty, then press .
Index
204
2013 RDX
6. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth device.
7. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to input on your phone. When your phone prompts you, input the four-digit pairing code.
9. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
205
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Connection, then press .
4. Rotate to select Pairing Code, then press .
5. Rotate to select Fixed or Random, then press .
1To change the pairing code setting The default pairing code is "0000" until you change the setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
Features
Index
206
To delete a paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Connection, then Delete a Phone.
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
207
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
2013 RDX
To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Text Message Notice, then press .
1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new text message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .
TOC
Features
Index
208
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To Create a Security PIN
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Passcode.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security PIN to. u Rotate to select a phone you want to add a security PIN to, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. u Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number. u Rotate to select, then press . Press to delete. Press to enter the security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen in step 2.
2013 RDX
1To Create a Security PIN In the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.
Features
QRG TOC
Index
Continued
209
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
TOC
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
2013 RDX
Features
Index
Caller's ID Information
You can select a caller's information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Caller ID Info.
3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen if the change is successful.
1Caller's ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller's name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority mode: A caller's phone number is displayed.
210
To Clear the System
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select System Clear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
4. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to finish.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Features
Continued
Index
211
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus QRG
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
TOC
2013 RDX
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
Pref Home Mobile Work Pager
Fax Car Message Other Voice
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Index
212
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
Speed Dial
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Speed Dial, then Add New.
1Speed Dial
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to store a speed dial number: 1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call. 2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, press the call the number using the voice tag.
button to
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
TOC
number from, then press .
Features
By Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone's imported phonebook.
By Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.
Index
Continued
213
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
2013 RDX
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Speed Dial.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using "home" as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use "John Smith" instead of "John."
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
TOC
press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
Features
Index
214
To delete a voice tag 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press . u Yonouthweilslcrreeceeniv.eRoatcaotenfirmatotiosenlemctesYseags,e
then press .
To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press . u You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
Features
TOC Index
Continued
215
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
2013 RDX
To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 197 2 Speed Dial P. 213
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
TOC
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
Features
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Index
To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-taggedPs.p1e9e7d dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation 2 Speed Dial P. 213
4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
216
To make a call using redial 1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 RDX QRG
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History,.then press
.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the list can be directly selected by pressing the corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired phone's speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
When a voice tag is stored, press the call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 213
button to
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
Continued
Features
TOC
Index
217
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller Name
TOC
2013 RDX
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the Press the
button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call.
1Receiving a Call Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
Features
Index
218
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
1Options During a Call Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
2013 RDX
QRG
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
TOC
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Features
Continued
Index
219
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
QRG TOC
Receiving a Text Message
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.
2. Rotate to select Yes to listen to the message, then press . u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press the BACK button.
2013 RDX
1Receiving a Text Message The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display upto 20 most recent text messages.
Only the first three lines of the received message are displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 224
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
Index
220
Displaying Messages
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
2013 RDX
1Displaying Messages The icon appears next to an unread message.
Only the first three lines of the received message are displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 224
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone's outbox.
QRG TOC
Features
Continued
Index
221
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG TOC
2013 RDX
Using the stop reading or read option 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu. 5. Rotate to select Stop Reading or Read,
then press .
1Using the stop reading or read option
This option changes to:
· Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message readout.
· Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option to hear the system reading out the selected message.
Features
Index
222
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Reply to a message You can reply to a message using one of the six common phrases available in the system. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate to select the reply message, then press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed. Select Yes to send the message.
2013 RDX
1Reply to a message The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
· Talk to you later, I'm driving. · I am on my way. · I'm running late. · OK · Yes · No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
After you reply, the following is displayed:
Features
QRG TOC
Continued
Index
223
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
QRG TOC
Index
224
Making a call to a sender You can call the text message sender. 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Call, then press . u HFL begins dialing.
Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Display Message, then press .
6. Rotate to scroll down and display the entire message.
2013 RDX
Compass *
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL. indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
3. Rotate to select Calibration, then press .
Compass Setting Menu Items
4. When the display changes to Calibration Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction after the calibration. The CAL. indicator goes off.
2013 RDX
1 Compass * Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions:
· Driving near power lines or stations · Crossing a bridge · Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
· When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
· The BACK button returns to the previous screen. · The SETUP button cancels the setting mode.
Features
QRG TOC
Index
* Not available on all models
225
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
QRG Compass Zone Selection
2013 RDX
1. Set the power mode to ON.
1Compass Zone Selection
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.
Zone Number
3. Rotate to select Zone, then press . The display shows the current zone number.
4. Rotate to select the zone number of your area (See Zone Map), then press .
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.
TOC
Zone Map
Features
Index
Guam Island: Zone 8 Puerto Rico: Zone 11
1 2 3 4
5 6
15 14
13
12
11 10 9 78
226 * Not available on all models
2013 RDX QRG
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 228 Maximum Load Limit........................ 231
Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 233 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 236 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 237
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information......................... 238 Important Safety Precautions............ 238 Avoiding Trouble ............................. 239
When Driving Starting the Engine .......................... 240
* Not available on all models
Precautions While Driving ................ 242 Automatic Transmission ................... 243 Shifting............................................ 244 Cruise Control ................................. 248 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System .. 251 AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control
System* .....................................................253 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 253 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 255 Braking
Brake System ................................... 257
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 259 Brake Assist System ......................... 260 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 261 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 262 Refueling Fuel Information .............................. 263 How to Refuel ................................. 264 Fuel Economy.................................... 265 Improving Fuel Economy.................. 265 Accessories and Modifications Accessories ...................................... 266 Modifications................................... 266
Index
227
Before Driving
QRG Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
2013 RDX
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
· Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.
· Make sure the hood is securely closed.
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in the hole.
Driving
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
TOC · Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 301
· Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Index
228
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
· Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 231
· Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
· Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.
· If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
· Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
· Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 136 2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 138
· Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 132 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 133
2013 RDX
1Interior Checks The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
Continued
229
Driving
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
QRG · Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. · Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32 · Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 68
TOC
Index
230
2013 RDX
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 870 lbs (395 kg). See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
1Maximum Load Limit
2013 RDX QRG
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,4000 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Continued
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 344
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 344
Driving
TOC
Index
231
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
QRG
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
TOC
Load Limits Example
Example1
Driving
Max Load 870 lbs (395 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 570 lbs (259 kg)
Example2 Index
Max Load 870 lbs (395 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 120 lbs (55 kg)
232
2013 RDX
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Towing Load Limits
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load
ToTonngguueeLLooad
Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight.
· Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
· To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed.
2013 RDX QRG
1Towing Load Limits
3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
TOC
tongue load.
Driving
Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 344
Index
Continued
233
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
QRG
2013 RDX
Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.
Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.
Driving
Trailer brakes Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: TOC There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.
Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
Index
234
Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Grand (Black)
Left Turn Signal (Yellow)
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
2013 RDX QRG
Right Turn Signal (Brown) Option (Pink)
Small (Red) Stop Light (Light Green)
Your trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.
TOC
Each pin's purpose and wiring color code are shown in the image.
Driving
When using a non-Acura trailer lighting harness and converter, get the connector and pins for your vehicle from a dealer.
Index
235
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
QRG Driving Safely with a Trailer
2013 RDX
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
· Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. · Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 233
· Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. · Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving. · Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. · Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
Towing Speeds and Gears
· Drive slower than normal. TOC · Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
· Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Driving
Turning and Braking
· Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. · Allow more time and distance for braking. · Do not brake or turn suddenly.
Index
Driving in Hilly Terrain
· Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
· Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
236
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 340
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
2013 RDX QRG
Driving
TOC
Index
237
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
QRG General Information
2013 RDX
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
3 WARNING
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers can be seriously injured or killed.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
· Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
TOC
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 231
Driving
· Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
· Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
· Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner's manual.
· Keep your speed low, and don't drive faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 26 2 Precautions While Driving P. 242
· It's up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
Index
238
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Avoiding Trouble
· Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
· Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
· Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
· Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
· Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can't clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don't try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
· Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
· If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Index
Driving
239
Driving
When Driving
QRG Starting the Engine
Brake Pedal TOC
Index
2013 RDX
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
Bring the keyless access remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless access remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 326
The engine may not start if the keyless access remote is subjected to strong radio waves. You do not need to hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 113
240
Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Shift to (P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button with your foot on the brake pedal.
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 RDX QRG
Starting to Drive
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 257
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
The brakes remain engaged briefly as you release the brake pedal.
1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
Driving
TOC Index
241
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
QRG Precautions While Driving
2013 RDX
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
1Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
· Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
· Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. · Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. · Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, TOC driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Driving
Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 26 2 Precautions While Driving P. 242
Index
242
Automatic Transmission Creeping
The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and increase creeping: · Immediately after the engine starts.
· When the climate control system is in use.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Driving
Index
243
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
QRG Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
2013 RDX
1Shifting You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.
Driving
Release Button TOC
Park Used when parking or starting the engine Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Used when idling
Drive Used for: Normal driving (gear change
between 1st and 6th automatically) Temporally driving in the sequential
mode
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.
Index
Drive (S) Used for: Automatically changing gears
between 1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at high speed) Driving in the sequential mode
244
Shift Lever Operation
Tachometer's red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
(M (Sequential Shift mode) Indicator/ Gear Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 RDX
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
QRG
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking transmission indicator indicates a
transmission problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
TOC
Driving
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
Index
Continued
245
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
QRG
Sequential Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift mode.
When the shift lever is in (D: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Driving
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive. TOC
When the shift lever is in (S: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode) indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. It will not automatically shift up, even if vehicle speed increases.
You can only pull away in 1st or 2nd gear.
Index
When switching out of the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position indicator go off.
246
2013 RDX
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Second gear lock mode If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
2013 RDX QRG
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the - paddle shifter, or move the shift lever from (S to (D.
Sequential Shift Mode Operation
- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling the - paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear.)
Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter. (Changes to a higher gear.)
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel economy and effective emission control.
Shift Up 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th
Normal Acceleration 15 mph (24 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 40 mph (64 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h) 50 mph (80 km/h)
The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Driving
TOC Index
247
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
QRG Cruise Control
2013 RDX
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
When to use
Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
1Cruise Control
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (S
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.
TOC
How to use
Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button.
Driving
Index
248
To Set the Vehicle Speed
On
DECEL/SET Button
On On when cruise control begins
Press and release
Take your foot off the pedal and press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control 2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Driving
Continued
Index
249
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
QRG
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons on the steering wheel.
To increase speed
2013 RDX
To decrease speed
Driving
TOC Index
· Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
· If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To Cancel
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button.
· Press the CRUISE button.
· Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
250
1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/ ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.
VSA® System Indicator
2013 RDX
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
QRG TOC
Driving
The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
Continued
Index
251
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
QRG
VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
2013 RDX
This button is on the driver side control panel. To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA® traction and stability enhancement.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
button until you hear a beep.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time
system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
you drove the vehicle.
TOC
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
Driving
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or blinks, the VSA® system turns on automatically. In this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.
Index
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
252
uuWhen DrivinguAWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System*
AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System*
2013 RDX QRG
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD with intelligent control system. When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD with intelligent control system, only the front wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.
1AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with Intelligent Control System*
NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD with intelligent control system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 307
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the multi-information display.
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 336
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
Driving
TOC Index
* Not available on all models
Continued
253
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
QRG
Tire Pressure Monitor
TOC
2013 RDX
To select the tire pressure monitor, set the power
mode to ON, and press the
/
(information) button until you see the tire
pressure screen.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI (U.S.) or kPa (Canada).
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a tire has significantly low pressure. The specific tire is displayed on the screen.
1Tire Pressure Monitor
The pressure displayed on the multi-information display can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the multi-information display do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer.
CHECK TPMS SYSTEM may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS.
Driving
Index
254
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
2013 RDX QRG
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
TOC
Driving
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-in flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Index
Continued
255
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
QRG Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale, which displays the symbol "TPMS" when illuminated. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TOC TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Index
256
2013 RDX
Braking
Brake System Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Depress the parking brake pedal down with your foot.
To release: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Depress the parking brake.
2013 RDX
1Parking Brake NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
QRG
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information display.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
TOC
Driving
Continued
Index
257
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
QRG TOC
Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 260 2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 259
2013 RDX
1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic brake booster that, under certain conditions, such as braking at high altitudes, supplements the vacuum power assist. When the hydraulic brake booster activates, you may hear a motor sound and a slight vibration in the pedal. This is normal.
Index
258
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
2013 RDX QRG
ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
"stomp and steer."
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
ABS operation
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
TOC
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
· When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
Driving
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
snow.
· When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
Index
259
Driving
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
QRG Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
TOC
Index
260
2013 RDX
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P. 4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
2013 RDX
1Parking Your Vehicle Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
QRG
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission:
· Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
· Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
· Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
TOC Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze in the applied position. To prevent this, use a block or wheel chock to prevent the wheels from moving.
Driving
Index
261
Multi-View Rear Camera
QRG About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with navigation system
For models with navigation system, see Navigation System Manual.
Models without navigation system
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle's rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Guidelines
Wide View Mode
Driving
TOC
Bumper
Normal View Mode
Camera Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Tailgate Open Range
Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Top Down View Mode
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
2013 RDX
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
Index
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the selector knob to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you shift into (R. If Top view was last used, Wide mode is selected.
262
Refueling
Fuel Information
Fuel recommendation Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
2013 RDX
1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Driving
QRG TOC
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit My Acura at owners.acura.com In Canada, visit www.acura.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel tank capacity: 16 US gal (60 liters)
Index
263
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
QRG How to Refuel
Pull
Driving
TOC Cap Cap
Index
Holder
264
2013 RDX
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. · Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away. · Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
If the fuel filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
2013 RDX QRG
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the multi-information display.
· Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
· Maintain the specified tire pressure.
· Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
· Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Miles driven 100
Gallons of fuel
Liter
Miles per Gallon
Kilometers
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
TOC
Driving
Index
265
Accessories and Modifications
QRG Accessories
2013 RDX
When installing accessories, check the following: · Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
· Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
· Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 337
· Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
TOC Modifications
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Driving
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
Index
266
2013 RDX QRG
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 268 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 269 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 270
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 271 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 275 Opening the Hood ........................... 276 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 277 Oil Check ......................................... 278 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 279 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 280
Engine Coolant ................................ 282 Transmission Fluid............................ 284 Brake Fluid....................................... 285 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 286 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 287 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 297 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 301 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 302 Tire Labeling .................................... 302 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......304 Wear Indicators................................ 306 Tire Service Life ................................ 306
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 307 Tire Rotation.................................... 308 Winter Tires ..................................... 309 Battery............................................... 310 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 311 Climate Control System Maintenance .....312 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 313 Exterior Care.................................... 315
Index
267
Before Performing Maintenance
QRG Inspection and Maintenance
2013 RDX
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and inspection information.
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are "certified" to EPA standards.
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Maintenance
TOC Index
Periodic inspections · Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 284
· Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 285
· Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 301
· Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 287
· Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 297
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 273
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 353
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
268
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
· To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
· Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
· To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
· Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
· Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
· The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.
· Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
· Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.
2013 RDX QRG
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
TOC Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.
Index
Maintenance
269
Maintenance
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
QRG Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Acura vehicles.
TOC
Index
270
2013 RDX
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
2013 RDX QRG
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the
/ button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the
multi-information display.
Remaining Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0
/ Button
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 273
Continued
Maintenance
TOC
Index
271
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display
2013 RDX
Maintenance Message SERVICE DUE SOON
Oil Life Display 15%
Explanation
Information
The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end
6 percent. Once you switch the
of its service life, and the maintenance
display by pressing the
/
items should be inspected and serviced
(information) button, this message soon.
will go off.
SERVICE DUE NOW
5%
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
/ button end of its service life, and the
to switch to another display.
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance
TOC SERVICE PAST DUE
Index
Negative Distance
The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be distance appears after driving over inspected and serviced immediately. 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
/
button to switch to another display.
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
272
Maintenance Service Items
System Message Indicator Maintenance Minder Message
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 RDX
1Maintenance Service Items
· Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
· Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
QRG
Main Item
Sub Items
CODE A B
Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes, service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If the message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
* Not available on all models
CODE 1 2
3 4
5 6
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission and transfer fluid* Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid*
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under 20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Continued
Maintenance
TOC
Index
273
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
QRG
Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
2013 RDX
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
Maintenance Item Codes Engine Oil Life
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
/ Button
SEL/RESET
TOC
Button
Maintenance
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Select CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS using the RESET button.
/ button, then press the SEL/
3. Select MAINTENANCE INFO. using the RESET button.
/ button, then press the SEL/
Index
4. Select RESET using the
/ button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The service code will disappear and the engine oil life display will return to
100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. 274
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange Loop)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Radiator Cap
2013 RDX QRG
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery
Automatic
TOC
Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (Yellow Loop)
Maintenance
Index
275
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
QRG Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
Pull
2013 RDX
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
TOC
Lever
Support Rod Grip
Maintenance
Index
276
Clamp
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
· Genuine Acura Motor Oil · Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
2013 RDX
1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
QRG
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute's latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown.
TOC
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
Index
277
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
QRG Oil Check
2013 RDX
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill.
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
TOC
Upper Mark Lower Mark
Maintenance
Index
278
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
2013 RDX
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage.
QRG
Maintenance
TOC
Index
279
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
QRG Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
2013 RDX
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multi-
information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
Drain Bolt
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Washer
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
280
Oil Filter
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter rubber seal.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
2013 RDX
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
QRG
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
281
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
QRG
Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank
MAX
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
2013 RDX
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE You will need a more concentrated coolant if you are driving in extremely cold temperature below -31°F (-35°C). Consult your Acura dealer for details about a suitable coolant mixture.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Maintenance
TOC Index
MIN
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
282
Radiator
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Radiator Cap
1Radiator
2013 RDX QRG
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the coolant system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
TOC
on the reserve tank.
Maintenance
Index
283
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index
Transmission Fluid
2013 RDX
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. 1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then turn off the engine. u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60 seconds (less than 90 seconds).
HOT Range
Upper Mark Lower Mark
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely, as shown in the image.
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix Acura ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Acura ATF DW1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered by Acura's new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. u It should be between the upper and lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
284
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MAX MIN
Brake Reservoir
2013 RDX
1Brake Fluid NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
QRG
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
285
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
QRG Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the 1/2 mark on the reservoir. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
1/2 Mark
2013 RDX
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.
Models with washer level sensor
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display. Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
286
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3) Low beam headlight: 55W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
35W (D2S for high voltage discharge type)
High Beam Headlight
Bulb
Coupler Tab
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it to the right.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
2013 RDX
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
The HB3 and H11 types are halogen bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
QRG
Models with high voltage discharge tube bulbs
Low Beam Headlights
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily after a vehicle wash
TOC
or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
High voltage can remain in the circuit for a long period of time after the light is switched off. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the high voltage discharge type
exterior light function. However, if you see a large amount of water or ice accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
bulbs yourself. Ask a dealer to inspect and replace low beam headlights.
inspected by a dealer.
Maintenance
Index
Continued
287
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
QRG
Models with halogen low beam headlight bulbs
Low Beam Headlights
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the cover to the left to remove.
Cover
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
Coupler
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
Tab
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Reinstall and rotate the cover to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the cover.
Bulb
TOC
Tab
Coupler
Maintenance
Index
288
2013 RDX
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
Fog Light Bulbs*
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Fog Light: 55 W (H11)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the fog light being
Clip
replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the right.
2013 RDX
1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
QRG
2. Remove the holding clip, and pull the inner fender back.
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Continued
Index
289
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
QRG Bulb 3. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 5. Insert new bulb.
2013 RDX
1Fog Light Bulbs* Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the central pin to remove the clip.
Central pin
Coupler
Tab
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push until it is flat.
TOC Push until the pin is flat.
Maintenance
Index Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs.
290 * Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber) Front Side Marker Light: 5W (Amber)
Socket
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side:Turn the steering wheel to the left.
Driver side:Turn the steering wheel to the
Bulb
right.
Bulb Socket
2. Remove the holding clips, and pull the inner fender back.
2 Fog Light Bulbs* P. 289
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Index
291
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
QRG Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Rear Side Marker/Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
TOC
Bolts
2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove the bolts.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Maintenance
Index
292
2013 RDX
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
2013 RDX QRG
Bulb
Socket Guide
6. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it on to the guide on the body.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
293
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light and Taillight Bulbs
QRG Back-Up Light and Taillight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: 16W Taillight: 3CP
1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
Maintenance
Bulb TOC
Socket
Index
294
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
3. Insert a new bulb.
2013 RDX
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb. Rear License Plate Light: 5W
1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
2013 RDX QRG
2. Push the tabs to remove the coupler. 3. Remove the old bulb.
Tab
4. Insert a new bulb.
TOC Bulb
Tab
Maintenance
Index
295
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb
QRG High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb. High-Mount Brake Light: 16 W
Lens Segment Screw
1. Remove the lens segment by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Bulb
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
TOC Socket
Maintenance
Index
296
2013 RDX
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper arm may scratch the window glass.
2013 RDX QRG
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.
Lock Tab
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab. Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw
driver. TOC
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
Maintenance
Continued
Index
297
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
QRG 4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and the retainer grooves.
Maintenance
TOC Indent
Tab Index
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.
298
2013 RDX
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2013 RDX
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.
QRG
2. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with the indent.
Blade Retainer
3. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and mount to a new rubber blade.
Rubber
Continued
Maintenance
TOC
Index
299
Maintenance
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber QRG
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm.
TOC
Index
300
2013 RDX
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
2013 RDX QRG
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver's doorjamb label or specification's page for the specified pressure.
1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month and before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: · Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. · Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. · Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. · Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 306
· Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
Maintenance
TOC
Index
301
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
QRG Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver's doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Label Example
a b
c
d
2013 RDX
1Tire and Loading Information Label The tire and loading information label attached to the driver's doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and spare.
Tire Labeling
Example TOC
Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.
Maintenance
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size
Tire Sizes
Index Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60R18 102V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tire's section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
302
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
2013 RDX QRG
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
TOC
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Maintenance
Index
303
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
QRG DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
2013 RDX
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test co For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance o TOC depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition these grades.
Maintenance
Index
304
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
2013 RDX QRG
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
1Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger care tires must
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is propertly inflated and not overloaded. Escessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
TOC
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Maintenance
Index
305
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
QRG Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is TOC recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Maintenance
Index
306
2013 RDX
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
2013 RDX QRG
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS, VSA® (vehicle stability assist), hill start assist, and the AWD (All-Wheel Drive) with intelligent control system* to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn't possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual.
Make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
TOC
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Index
307
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
QRG Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
2013 RDX
1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
FRONT
Rotation Mark
Tires with rotation marks
TOC Front
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Maintenance
Index
308
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked "M+S" tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: · Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. · Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: · Install them on the front tires only. · Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below: Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain TC2212MM
· Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
· Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. · Drive slowly.
2013 RDX
1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
Maintenance
QRG
TOC Index
309
Battery
QRG Checking the Battery
2013 RDX
Test Indicator Window
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at the test indicator window and check the terminals for corrosion.
1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: · The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 160
· The clock resets.
2 Setting the Clock P. 96
· The navigation system* is disabled.
TOC
2 Refer to navigation system manual
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.
Index
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator's color information is on the battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
310 * Not available on all models
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key.
Press
2013 RDX
1Replacing the Button Battery NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
QRG
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
Battery
2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
311
Climate Control System Maintenance
QRG Dust and Pollen Filter
2013 RDX
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Maintenance
TOC
Index
312
Cleaning
Interior Care
2013 RDX QRG
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
TOC
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Maintenance
Continued
Index
313
uuCleaninguInterior Care QRG
Floor Mats
Unlock Lock
2013 RDX
The front floor mats hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mats from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.
Maintaining Genuine Leather
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or TOC dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance
Index
314
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
uuCleaninguExterior Care
2013 RDX QRG
Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:
· If driving on roads with road salt. · If driving in coastal areas. · If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
Using an Automated Vehicle Wash
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated vehicle wash.
Air Intake Vents
TOC
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Maintenance
· Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
· Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
Index
Continued
315
uuCleaninguExterior Care
QRG
Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle's paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle's paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
2013 RDX
1Applying Wax NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up spills immediately.
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
TOC Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
Maintenance
Index
316
2013 RDX QRG
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 318
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 319
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 325 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak .......................................... 326 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 327
Jump Starting.................................... 328 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 330
Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 331
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ................................. 333 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ...................................... 333 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ........................ 334 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes Comes On ......................................... 335 If the EPS System Indicator Comes On...... 335
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 336
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 337 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 339
Emergency Towing........................... 340 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate..... 341
Index
317
Tools
QRG Types of Tools
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar
2013 RDX
1Types of Tools 2 How to Set Up the Jack P. 322
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
318
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
2013 RDX QRG
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to (P. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Handling the Unexpected
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
TOC
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Index
Continued
319
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the cargo area floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected
Spare Tire TOC
Index
320
2. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle bar out of the cargo area.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Take the jack out of the spare tire area.
2013 RDX
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 RDX QRG
Wheel
Blocks The tire to be replaced.
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
Handling the Unexpected
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
Continued
TOC Index
321
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
2013 RDX
1How to Set Up the Jack
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the image) clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
· Do not use while the engine is running.
· Use only where the ground is firm and level.
TOC
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar · Use only at the jacking points.
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
· Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
ground.
· Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Index
Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
322
Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 RDX
1Replacing the Flat Tire Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)
Continued
TOC Index
323
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
QRG
2013 RDX
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
Wing Bolt
Spacer Cone
For normal tire For compact spare tire
1. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack's end bracket to lock it in place.
2. Remove the center cap.
3. Place the flat tire face up in the spare tire well.
4. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt for the spare tire, and insert the wing bolt for the normal tire back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
5. Securely store the wheel nut wrench and jack handle bar back in the cargo area.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS SYSTEM appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the multi-information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
1TPMS and the Spare Tire The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem.
324
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
2013 RDX
1Checking the Engine If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it. 2 Jump Starting P. 328
QRG
Starter condition
Checklist
Starter doesn't turn or turns Check brightness of the interior light.
over slowly.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
The battery may be dead. Check If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
each of the items on the right and
2 Battery P. 310
respond accordingly.
If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 337
Handling the Unexpected
The starter turns over normally Review the engine start procedure.
but the engine doesn't start. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 240
There may be a problem with the Check the immobilizer system indicator.
fuse. Check each of the items on When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. the right and respond accordingly. 2 Immobilizer System P. 113
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 82
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
TOC
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 339
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 340
Index
325
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
QRG If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON
message appears on the multi-information display, the indicator on the ENGINE
START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won't start, start the engine as
follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the A logo on the keyless
access remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
HOLD
The buttons on the keyless access remote
should be facing you.
uThe indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the indicator changes from flashing to on. uIf you don't depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY.
TOC
Index
326
2013 RDX
Emergency Engine Stop
If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do either of the following operations: · Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for three seconds.
· Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P, and to ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P.
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
2013 RDX
1Emergency Engine Stop Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
327
Jump Starting
Handling the Unexpected
QRG
TOC Index
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
Booster Battery
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
2013 RDX
1Jump Starting
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
328
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
uuJump Startingu 2013 RDX QRG
TOC Index
329
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
QRG
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.
Releasing the Lock
Slot Cover
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless access remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver and remove the cover of the shift lock release slot. u Put the tip of the flat-tip screwdriver into the slot and remove it as shown in the image.
Handling the Unexpected
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
Release Button
5. While pushing on the key, press the shift lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N.
TOC
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Shift Lock Release Slot
Index
330
2013 RDX
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: · The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
· Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
1How to Handle Overheating
2013 RDX QRG
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
2. No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood.
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
TOC Index
331
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
QRG
Next thing to do
MAX MIN
Reserve Tank
2013 RDX
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
Handling the Unexpected
Last thing to do TOC Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.
Index
332
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2013 RDX
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
QRG
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The light goes out: Start driving again. u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
What to do when the indicator comes on
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
TOC
the battery.
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
Index
333
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
QRG If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
2013 RDX
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
· Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
· Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
Handling the Unexpected
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.
What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. TOC 2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once. 3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
Index
When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
334
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S. Canada
Reasons for the indicator to come on · The brake fluid is low. · There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. · If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. · If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
2013 RDX
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
QRG
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on
1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
· Comes on when there is a problem with EPS system.
NOTICE
· If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. What to do when the indicator comes on
the full left or right position for a while, the system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
TOC
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
system cools down, EPS system is restored. Repeated
inspected by a dealer.
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.
Index
335
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
QRG If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
2013 RDX
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
What to do when the indicator comes on
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
What to do when the indicator blinks Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire has triggered the indicator to blink, change the tire to a fullsize tire. The indicator goes off after a while.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
336
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
EPS
70 A
Power Tailgate Motor* (40 A)
ABS/VSA FSR
1
ABS/VSA Motor
20 A 40 A
E-DPS
30 A
Main Fuse
120 A
ST CUT
50 A
Fuse Box Main 1
60 A
Fuse Box Main 2
60 A
IG Main
50 A
2
Headlight Washer
(30 A)
Sub Fan Motor
30 A
Rear Defogger
40 A
Main Fan Motor
30 A
Headlight Main
30 A
Blower
40 A
Driver's Power Seat Sliding 20 A
Driver's Power Seat Reclining 20 A 3 Passenger's Power Seat Sliding 20 A
Passenger's Power Seat Reclining 20 A
4
-
-
5
STR Diagnosis Fuse
7.5 A
6
-
-
7
-
-
8
-
-
* Not available on all models
2013 RDX QRG
Circuit Protected
9
-
10
-
11
Oil Level
12
Fog Lights*
13 Power Tailgate Closer*
14
Hazard
15
IGP2
16
IG Coil
17
Stop
18
Horn
19
ACM
20 Right Headlight Low Beam
21
MG Clutch
22
DBW
23 Left Headlight Low Beam
24
ACC
25
FI Main
26
Trailer
27
Small
28
Interior Lights
29
Back Up
Amps - -
7.5 A (20 A) (20 A) 10 A 15 A 15 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A*1 15 A*2 7.5 A 15 A 10 A*1 15 A*2 10 A (15 A) (20 A) 20 A 7.5 A 10 A
*1:Models with halogen low beam headlight bulbs
*2:Models with high voltage discharge tube bulbs
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
337
uuFusesuFuse Locations
QRG
Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse Box
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse Label
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
TOC Index
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
1
-
-
2
ACG
15 A
3
SRS
10 A
4
Fuel Pump
15 A
5
Meter
7.5 A
6
Option
7.5 A
7
VB SOL
10 A
8
Front Right Side Door Lock Motor (Unlock)
15 A
338
Circuit Protected
9
Rear Left Side Door Lock Motor (Unlock)
10
Power Lumbar
11
Moonroof
12
Accessory Power Socket (Center Console)
13
Washer Main
14
Seat Heaters
15
Driver's Door Lock Motor (Unlock)
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
ACC
20
ACC Key Lock
21 Daytime Running Lights
22
A/C
23
Rear Wiper
24
ABS/VSA
25
-
26
Audio Amp
27
Accessory Power Socket (Front)
28
-
29
ODS
30
Driver's Door Lock Motor (Lock)
Amps
15 A
7.5 A 20 A
15 A
15 A 15 A
10 A
- - - 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 7.5 A - 20 A
15 A
- 7.5 A
10 A
2013 RDX
Circuit Protected
31
Smart
32
Front Right Side Door Lock Motor (Lock)
33
Rear Left Side Door Lock Motor (Lock)
34
Small Lights
35
Illumination
36
Rear Wiper Main
37
-
38 Left Headlight High Beam
39 Right Headlight High Beam
40
TPMS
41
Door Lock
42 Driver's Power Window
43
Rear Right Side Power Window
44
Front Right Side Power Window
45
Rear Left Side Power Window
46
Wiper
Amps 10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A
- 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
2013 RDX QRG
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 337 to P. 338.
Fuse Puller
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
339
Emergency Towing
QRG
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
2WD models
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
2013 RDX
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
340
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the cover on the inside of the tailgate.
2013 RDX
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate What to do-Following up After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
QRG
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.
Handling the Unexpected
Cover Models with power tailgate
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while sliding the lever to the right using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Do not use your finger to slide the lever.
TOC Lever
Index
Continued
341
uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu
QRG
Models without power tailgate
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing down the lever with the flattip screwdriver.
2013 RDX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC Index
342
2013 RDX QRG
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 344 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 346 Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 346 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 347 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 348
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 349
Warranty Coverages ........................ 351 Authorized Manuals......................... 353 Client Service Information ............... 354
Index
343
Specifications
QRG
Vehicle Specifications
Model
Acura RDX
No. of Passengers:
Front
2
Rear
3
Total
5
Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)
U.S.: 4,850 lbs (2,200 kg)*1 4,982 lbs (2,260 kg)*2
Canada: 2,260 kg U.S.: 2,557 lbs (1,160 kg)*1
2,623 lbs (1,190 kg)*2
Canada: 1,190 kg
Gross Axle Weight
U.S.: 2,293 lbs (1,040 kg)*1
Rating (Rear)
2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)*2
Canada: 1,080 kg
Gross Combined Weight U.S.: 6,349 lbs (2,880 kg)*1
Rating
6,482 lbs (2,940 kg)*2
Canada: 2,940 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type
HFC-134a (R-134a) 15.2 16.9 oz (430 480 g) ND-OIL8
*1: 2WD models *2: AWD models
Information
TOC Index
2013 RDX
Engine Specifications
Displacement
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs
NGK DENSO
ILZKR7B11 SXU22HCR11
Fuel
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
Battery
Capacity/Type
Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane number of 91 or higher 16 US gal (60 )
60AH(5)/72AH(20)
Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 5.1 US qt (4.85 )
Light Bulbs
Headlights (High Beams)
Headlights (Low Beams)
Fog Lights*1 Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) Front Side Marker Lights Rear Side Marker/Brake/Taillights Taillights Back-Up Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Light Cargo Area Lights Vanity Mirror Lights Interior Lights
Map Lights Ceiling Light Door Courtesy Lights Console Compartment Light Glove Box Light Foot Light Center Pocket Light
60W (HB3) 35W (D2S)* 55W (H11)* 55W (H11) 28/8W (Amber)
LED
5W (Amber) 21/5W 3CP 16W 21W 16W 5W 5W 1.4W
LED 8W 2CP 1.4W 1.4W LED LED
Brake Fluid
Specified
Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
344 * Not available on all models
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified Capacity
Acura ATF DW-1(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Rear Differential Fluid*
Specified
Acura All Wheel Drive Fluid (DPSF)
Capacity
Change 1.32 US qt (1.25 )
Transfer Assembly Fluid*
Specified
Acura HGO-1
Capacity
Change 0.43 US qt (0.41 )
uu Specifications u
Engine Oil
Recommended
Capacity
·Genuine Acura Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 4.23 US qt (4.0 ) Change including 4.55 US qt (4.3 ) filter
Engine Coolant
Specified Ratio
Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.75 US gal (6.6 ) (change including the remaining 0.193 US gal (0.73 ) in the reserve tank)
Tire
Regular
Compact Spare Wheel Size
Size Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Size Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Regular Compact Spare
2013 RDX QRG
P235/60R18 102V 33 (230 [2.3]) T165/90R17 105M 60 (420 [4.2]) 18 x 7.5J 17 x 4T
Information
* Not available on all models
TOC Index
345
Identification Numbers
QRG Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
2013 RDX
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the image below for the VIN locations.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Cover
Engine Number
Information
Automatic Transmission Number
TOC Index
Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number
346
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Audio System Bluetooth® Audio Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Immobilizer System Remote Transmitter Keyless Access System Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two cond itions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
2013 RDX QRG
TOC Index
347
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
QRG In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could ca use injury or should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information
TOC Index
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transpor cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada In
To contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-3 For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
348
2013 RDX
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
2013 RDX QRG
Your vehicle uses "readiness codes," as part of its onboard self diagnostic system. Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
Information
TOC Index
Continued
349
Information
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
QRG 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
TOC Index
350
2013 RDX
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle's emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit. Accessory Limited Warranty Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
Continued
2013 RDX QRG
TOC Index
351
Information
Information
uuWarranty Coveragesu
QRG Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle's original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
TOC Index
352
2013 RDX
Authorized Manuals
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
For U.S. Owners: The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering other models' or other years' manuals.
Publication Form Number
61TX430 31TX4600 31TX4800 31TX4M00 31TX4A00 31TX4B00
ACU-R
Form Description
2013 Acura RDX Body Repair Manual 2013 Acura RDX Owner's Manual
2013 Acura RDX Navigation System Owner's Manual 2013 Acura RDX Maintenance Journal
2013 Acura RDX Advanced Technology Guide (BASE) 2013 Acura RDX Advanced Technology Guide (TECH) Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate Year and Model Desired
2013 RDX
1Authorized Manuals Body Repair Manual: Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.
QRG
For Canadian Owners: Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le numéro de pièce 33TX4C00
Information
TOC Index
353
Client Service Information
QRG Acura dealer personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Acura Client Relations/ Services.
U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Relations Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 382-2238
Canadian Owners: Honda Canada Inc. Acura Client Services 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-Mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
2013 RDX
1Client Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information:
· Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) P. 346
· Date of purchase · Odometer reading of your vehicle · Your name, address, and telephone number · A detailed description of the problem · Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Information
TOC Index
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546
354
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Numbers
4WD .......................................................... 253
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 259 Accessories and Modifications ................ 266 Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 148 Additives
Coolant .................................................. 282 Engine Oil ............................................... 277 Washer ................................................... 286 Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 277 Adjusting Armrest .................................................. 142 Front Seats.............................................. 136 Head Restraints....................................... 138 Mirrors.................................................... 133 Rear Seats............................................... 141 Steering Wheel ....................................... 132 Temperature ............................................. 85 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ....................... 152 Changing the Mode................................ 152 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 153 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 312 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 152 Sensors ................................................... 155 Synchronized Mode ................................ 154 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 152
Air Conditioning System (Heating and Cooling System) Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 312
Air Pressure ....................................... 302, 345 Airbags ........................................................ 37
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43 After a Collision......................................... 41 Airbag Care ............................................... 51 Event Data Recorder .................................. 21 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40 Indicator ........................................ 48, 72, 75 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 49 Sensors...................................................... 37 Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 46 Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 50 Side Airbags .............................................. 44 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 47 AM/FM Radio ............................................ 167 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 259 Indicator .................................................... 71 Armrest ..................................................... 142 Audio Remote Controls............................ 165 Audio System ............................................ 158 Adjusting the Sound ................................ 166 Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 159 Error Messages ........................................ 187 General Information ................................ 190 iPod® ....................................................... 174 MP3/WMA/AAC ...................................... 179 Pandora® ................................................. 177 Reactivating............................................. 160
2013 RDX
Recommended CDs................................. 191 Recommended Devices............................ 193 Security Code.......................................... 160 Theft Protection ...................................... 160 USB Adapter Cable.................................. 159 USB Flash Drives ...................................... 193 Audio/Information Display ...................... 162 Authorized Manuals ................................ 353 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 106 Customize................................................. 92 Automatic Lighting .................................. 123 Automatic Transmission........................... 243 Creeping ................................................. 243 Fluid........................................................ 284 Kickdown................................................ 243 Operating the Shift Lever................... 14, 245 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 246 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 330 Shifting ................................................... 244 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 159 Average Fuel Economy .............................. 85 Average Speed ........................................... 86 AWD.......................................................... 253
QRG
B
Battery ...................................................... 310 Charging System Indicator................. 69, 333 Jump Starting.......................................... 328 Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 310
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 29
Index
355
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG Index
Beverage Holders...................................... 147 Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 182 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ..................... 196 Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 63 Brake System............................................. 257
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 259 Brake Assist System ................................. 260 Brake System Indicator............................... 68 Fluid ........................................................ 285 Foot Brake ............................................... 258 Indicator ............................................ 68, 335 Parking Brake .......................................... 257 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 128 Bulb Replacement..................................... 287 Back-Up Light and Taillight ...................... 294 Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light ............ 292 Fog Lights................................................ 289 Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front
Side Marker Light ................................... 291 Headlights ............................................... 287 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 296 Rear License Plate Light............................ 295 Bulb Specifications.................................... 344
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 64 Cargo Hook ............................................... 149 Carrying Cargo.................................. 229, 231 CD Player ................................................... 171
Certification Label.................................... 346 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 287 Charging System Indicator................. 69, 333 Child Safety................................................. 52
Childproof Door Locks............................. 105 Child Seat.................................................... 52
Booster Seats ............................................ 63 Child Seat for Infants................................. 54 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 55 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 59 Larger Children ......................................... 62 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 56 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 105 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 315 Cleaning the Interior................................ 313 Client Service Information ....................... 354 Climate Control System............................ 152 Changing the Mode ................................ 152 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 153 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 312 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 152 Sensors ................................................... 155 Synchronized Mode................................. 154 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 152 Clock............................................................ 96 Coat Hook................................................. 149 Compact Spare Tire .......................... 319, 345 Compass .................................................... 225
2013 RDX
Console Compartment............................. 146 Controls ...................................................... 95 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 282
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 283 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 282 Overheating............................................ 331 Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 243 Cruise Control .......................................... 248 Indicator ................................................... 76 Cup Holders .............................................. 147 Customized Features ................................. 87
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 125 Dead Battery ............................................ 328 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ................................................. 153 Detachable Anchor .................................... 34 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 347 Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 122 Rearview Mirror ...................................... 133 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 278 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 122 Display Button.......................................... 162 Door Mirrors............................................. 134 Doors .......................................................... 97 Auto Door Locking.................................. 106 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 106 Door Open Indicator ........................... 28, 73
356
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Keys.......................................................... 97 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside...................................... 104 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside..................................... 99 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 100 DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 304 Driver's Seat Lumbar Support ................. 136 Driving ...................................................... 227 Automatic Transmission .......................... 243 Braking ................................................... 257 Cruise Control ........................................ 248 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines .............. 238 Shifting Gear .......................................... 244 Starting the Engine ................................. 240 Driving Position Memory System ............ 130 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 312
E
Elapsed Time .............................................. 86 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 74, 335 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 251 Emergency................................................ 340 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 349 Engine....................................................... 346
Coolant .................................................. 282 Jump Starting ......................................... 328 Oil .......................................................... 277 Starting................................................... 240
Engine Coolant ......................................... 282 Adding to the Radiator ............................ 283 Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 282 Overheating ............................................ 331 Temperature Gauge .................................. 82
Engine Oil ................................................. 277 Adding .................................................... 279 Checking ................................................. 278 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 271 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 69, 333 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 277
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ............................................... 74, 335
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 64
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 315 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 134
F
Features..................................................... 157 Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 312 Oil ........................................................... 280 Flat Tire ..................................................... 319 Floor Mats ................................................. 314 Fluids Automatic Transmission........................... 284 Brake....................................................... 285 Engine Coolant........................................ 282 Windshield Washer.................................. 286
2013 RDX
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 75 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 141 Foot Brake ................................................ 258 Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 40 Front Seats ................................................ 136
Adjusting ................................................ 136 Fuel...................................................... 15, 263
Economy ................................................. 265 Gauge....................................................... 82 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 71 Range ....................................................... 86 Recommendation .................................... 263 Refueling................................................. 263 Fuel Economy ........................................... 265 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 15, 264 Message.................................................. 334 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 15, 264 Fuses.......................................................... 337 Inspecting and Changing......................... 339 Locations......................................... 337, 338
QRG
G
Gasoline (Fuel) Economy ................................................. 265 Gauge....................................................... 82 Information ............................................. 263 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 71 Refueling................................................. 263
Gauges ........................................................ 82
Index
357
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG Index
Gear Shift Lever Positions Automatic Transmission........................... 244
Glass (care) ................................................ 316 Glove Box .................................................. 145
H
Halogen Bulbs................................... 287, 289 Handling the Unexpected ........................ 317 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ............................... 196
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ..................................... 212
Automatic Transferring ............................ 210 Caller's ID Information ............................. 210 HFL Buttons ............................................. 196 HFL Menus .............................................. 198 HFL Status Display.................................... 197 Making a Call .......................................... 215 Options During a Call .............................. 219 Phone Setup ............................................ 203 Receiving a Call ....................................... 218 Speed Dial ............................................... 213 Text Message................................... 208, 220 To Clear the System................................. 211 To Create a Security PIN........................... 209 Hazard Warning Button............................... 2 Head Restraints......................................... 138 Headlights ................................................. 122 Aiming .................................................... 287 Automatic Operation ............................... 123 Dimming ......................................... 122, 125
Operating................................................ 122 Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 151 HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 196 High Beam Indicator .................................. 74 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 241 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 194
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 346 Engine and Transmission ......................... 346 Vehicle Identification ............................... 346
Illumination Control................................. 128 Knob....................................................... 128
Immobilizer System .................................. 113 Indicator.................................................... 75
Indicators .................................................... 68 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 71 AWD System ............................................. 72 Brake System............................................. 68 Charging System ............................... 69, 333 CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 76, 249 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 76, 248 Door Open .......................................... 28, 73 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System.. 74, 335 Fog Light................................................... 75 High Beam ................................................ 74 Immobilizer System ................................... 75 Lights On .................................................. 75 Low Fuel ................................................... 71 Low Oil Pressure................................ 69, 333
2013 RDX
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............................ 74 Maintenance Minder............................... 271 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 69, 334 Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 68, 335 Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 30, 71 Security System Alarm............................... 76 Shift Lever Position.................................... 70 Side Airbag Off ................................... 50, 75 Supplemental Restraint System ........... 48, 72 System Message ....................................... 76 Transmission ............................................. 70 Turn Signal ............................................... 74 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 73, 251 VSA® OFF.......................................... 73, 252 Information .............................................. 343 Instrument Panel........................................ 67 Brightness Control .................................. 128 Interior Lights........................................... 143 Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 133 iPod® ......................................................... 174
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 322 Jump Starting........................................... 328
358
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
K
Key Number Tag ........................................ 98 Keyless Access System .............................. 101 Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 100 Keys............................................................. 97
Lockout Prevention ................................. 100 Number Tag.............................................. 98 Rear Door Won't Open ........................... 105 Remote Transmitter .................................. 99 Types and Functions.................................. 97 Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ...... 243
L
Language (HFL) ........................................ 197 LATCH (Child Seats) ............................. 57, 60 Lights ................................................ 122, 287
Automatic............................................... 123 Bulb Replacement ................................... 287 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 125 Fog Lights ............................................... 125 High Beam Indicator ................................. 74 Interior.................................................... 143 Light Switches......................................... 122 Lights On Indicator.................................... 75 Turn Signals ............................................ 122 Load Limits ............................................... 231 Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 97 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 106 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 105 From Inside ............................................. 104
From Outside............................................. 99 Keys .......................................................... 97 Using a Key ............................................. 100 Lockout Prevention System...................... 100 Low Battery Charge.................................. 333 Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 71 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 333 Lower Anchors ...................................... 57, 60 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 231
M
Maintenance ............................................. 267 Battery .................................................... 310 Brake Fluid .............................................. 285 Cleaning.................................................. 313 Climate Control System ........................... 312 Coolant ................................................... 282 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 271 Oil ........................................................... 278 Precautions.............................................. 268 Radiator .................................................. 283 Remote Transmitter ................................. 311 Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 287 Safety ...................................................... 269 Service Items ........................................... 273 Tires ........................................................ 301 Transmission Fluid ................................... 284 Under the Hood ...................................... 275
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 69, 334 Map Lights ................................................ 143
2013 RDX
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 231 Meters, Gauges........................................... 82 Mirrors ...................................................... 133
Adjusting ................................................ 133 Door ....................................................... 134 Exterior ................................................... 134 Interior Rearview ..................................... 133 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 266 Moonroof ................................................. 118 MP3 ................................................... 171, 179 Multi-Information Display ......................... 83 Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 262
QRG
N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 346
O
Odometer ................................................... 84 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 238 Oil (Engine)............................................... 277
Adding.................................................... 279 Checking................................................. 278 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 271 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 333 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 277 Viscosity .................................................. 277 Opening/Closing Hood....................................................... 276 Moonroof ............................................... 118
Index
359
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG Index
Power Windows ...................................... 115 Tailgate ................................................... 107 Outside Temperature Display .................... 85 Overheating .............................................. 331
P
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode) ......................... 246
Pandora® ................................................... 177 Panic Mode ............................................... 114 Parking ...................................................... 261 Parking Brake............................................ 257 Parking Brake and
Brake System Indicator ..................... 68, 335 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 49 Passing Indicators ..................................... 122 Power Tailgate.......................................... 109 Power Windows........................................ 115 Precautions While Driving........................ 242
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle ........................... 242
Rain......................................................... 242 Pregnant Women ....................................... 35 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 319
R
Radiator..................................................... 283 Radio (AM/FM).......................................... 167 Radio (XM®) .............................................. 169
Radio Data System (RDS) ......................... 168 Range .......................................................... 86 RDS (Radio Data System) ......................... 168 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 349 Rear Defogger/
Heated Door Mirror Button................... 129 Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 141 Rearview Camera ..................................... 262 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 133 Refueling .................................................. 263
Fuel Gauge................................................ 82 Gasoline.......................................... 263, 344 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 71 Regulations............................... 255, 304, 347 Remote Transmitter ................................... 99 Replacement Bulbs....................................................... 287 Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 297 Fuses............................................... 337, 338 Rear Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 299 Tires ........................................................ 307 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 348 Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 85
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 23 Safety Check ............................................... 28 Safety Labels............................................... 65 Safety Message........................................... 22 Seat Belts .................................................... 29
2013 RDX
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 33 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 31 Checking .................................................. 36 Detachable Anchor ................................... 34 Fastening .................................................. 32 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 59 Pregnant Women...................................... 35 Reminder .................................................. 30 Warning Indicator ............................... 30, 71 Seat Heaters ............................................. 151 Seats.......................................................... 136 Adjusting ................................................ 136 Driver's Seat Lumbar Support .................. 136 Front Seats.............................................. 136 Rear Seats............................................... 141 Seat Heaters ........................................... 151 Security System ........................................ 113 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 75 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 76 SEL/RESET Button ....................................... 83 Select Lever ........................................ 14, 244 Operation ......................................... 14, 245 Releasing ................................................ 330 Won't Move ........................................... 330 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 161 Sequential Shift Mode............................. 246 Setting the Clock........................................ 96 Shift Lever .......................................... 14, 244 Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 70, 245
360
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Shifting (Transmission) ............................ 244 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 33 Side Airbags ............................................... 44
Cutoff System........................................... 46 Off Indicator ............................................. 46 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 47 SMS Text Message............................ 208, 220 Snow Tires ................................................ 309 Spare Tire ......................................... 319, 345 Spark Plugs ............................................... 344 Specifications ........................................... 344 Specified Fuel ................................... 263, 344 Speedometer.............................................. 82 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 40 Starting the Engine.................................. 240 Does Not Start ........................................ 325 Jump Starting ......................................... 328 Steering Wheel ........................................ 132 Adjusting ................................................ 132 Stopping ................................................... 261 Summer Tires............................................ 309 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 150 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 40 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel)........ 2, 3, 119 Synchronized Mode ................................. 154 System Message Indicator ......................... 76
T
Tachometer ................................................. 82 Tailgate ..................................................... 107
Unable to Open ....................................... 341 Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ..................... 85 Temperature Gauge ................................... 82 Temperature Sensor ........................... 85, 155 Text Message .................................... 208, 220 Time (Setting) ............................................. 96 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 253 Indicator ............................................ 74, 336 Tires ........................................................... 301 Air Pressure ..................................... 302, 345 Checking and Maintaining....................... 301 Inspection................................................ 301 Labeling .................................................. 302 Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 319 Regulations ............................................. 304 Rotation .................................................. 308 Spare Tire ........................................ 319, 345 Summer .................................................. 309 Tire Chains .............................................. 309 Wear Indicators ....................................... 306 Winter ..................................................... 309 Tools .......................................................... 318 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 233 Equipment and Accessories ..................... 234 Load Limits .............................................. 233
2013 RDX
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 237 Emergency .............................................. 340
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 253
Indicator............................................ 74, 336 Transmission ............................................. 244
Automatic ............................................... 244 Fluid........................................................ 284 Number................................................... 346 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 246 Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 70, 245 Trip Meter................................................... 85 Troubleshooting....................................... 317 Blown Fuse...................................... 337, 338 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 18 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 19 Emergency Towing.................................. 340 Engine Won't Start.................................. 325 Noise When Braking.................................. 20 Overheating ............................................ 331 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 319 Rear Door Won't Open...................... 19, 105 Select Lever Won't Move......................... 330 Warning Indicators .................................... 68 Turn Signals .............................................. 122 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 74
QRG
Index
361
INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
QRG
U
Unlocking the Doors................................... 99 Unlocking the Front Doors
from the Inside.................................. 10, 104 USB Adapter Cable ........................... 158, 159 USB Flash Drives........................................ 193
V
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 5 Vehicle Identification Number................. 346 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) .................. 251
Off Button ............................................... 252 Off Indicator .............................................. 73 System Indicator ................................ 73, 251 Viscosity (Oil)..................................... 277, 345 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 251
Switch..................................................... 126 Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 115 Windshield................................................ 126
Cleaning ................................................. 316 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 153 Washer Fluid ........................................... 286 Wiper Blades ........................................... 297 Wipers and Washers................................ 126 Winter Tires .............................................. 309 Snow Tires .............................................. 309 Tire Chains .............................................. 309 Wipers and Washers................................. 126 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 297 Front ....................................................... 126 Rear ........................................................ 127 WMA ................................................. 171, 179 Worn Tires ................................................ 301
2013 RDX
Index
W
Wallpaper.................................................. 184 Warning and Information Messages ......... 78 Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 333 Warning Labels ........................................... 65 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 351 Watts ......................................................... 344 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 306 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)............ 322 Window Washers...................................... 126
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 286
362
X
XM® Radio ................................................ 169
Aspose.Pdf for .NET 17.6 Aspose Ltd.